JP7260745B2 - pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

It relates to a pachinko game machine.

As a recent pachinko game machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is triggered when a game ball enters the starting hole on the game board (game area), and if you win the jackpot lottery, you win a big hit (special game ) state, and a large winning opening provided on the game board can be opened to win a large number of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines constructed in this way, there are a probability variable game state for increasing the probability of winning in the big win lottery and a time shortening game state for increasing the efficiency of pattern variation for notifying the lottery result in the big win lottery. There is also a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player by these game states.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-347000

However, since many such gaming machines have existed in the past, there is a problem that the development of a machine capable of realizing even more novel game characteristics is desired.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect is
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, the first main game starting port A10, A10-2),
an identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
When the approval/disapproval judgment permission condition for a certain hold is satisfied, a decision is made based on the random number associated with the hold, and the stop display mode and the variable display mode of the identification information are determined based on the result of the pass/fail decision. game content determination means;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game in an advantageous state for the player after the identification information is stop-displayed after winning is determined as a result of winning/failure determination based on the random number;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a performance pattern display control means for controlling to display the final display mode of the performance symbols in the performance display unit after the performance symbols are variably displayed in the performance display unit;
If the final display mode of the performance symbols is a special stop combination (for example, a chance), it can suggest the possibility that there is a hold in which the result of the winning judgment is a win in the hold that has occurred based on the special stop combination. is configured as
The special stop combination is the case where the two symbol variation areas (for example, the left symbol and the middle symbol, or the middle symbol and the right symbol) in the final display mode have the same type of effect symbol,
If the special stop combination is not displayed in the next change after the change in which the special stop combination is displayed,
Of the first design for effect displayed in the first design variation area or the third design for effect displayed in the third design variation area in the variation in which the special stop combination is displayed, it is displayed as the special stop combination . It is constructed so that the performance symbols with low expectation of winning in the case of winning can be displayed in the first symbol variation area or the third symbol variation area even in the variation in which the special stop combination is not displayed,
In the special stop combination, the second design for performance displayed in the second design variation area is the first design for performance displayed in the first design variation area or the third design for performance displayed in the third design variation area. The execution expectation of the special game differs depending on whether it is displayed with the same production pattern as
It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize a further innovative gaming property in the gaming machine that employs the concept of creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a working diagram relating to the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of setting change processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flow chart of NMI interrupt processing (at power failure) on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of prize ball payout command transmission control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an image diagram of a prize ball payout command and payout-related information on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart of ball entry detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flow chart of auxiliary game start entrance ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main game starting entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main game starting entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flow chart of the first (second) big winning hole entry detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of general winning hole entry ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart of out-hole entrance ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart of the number-of-prizing-balls determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the electric accessary product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the sorting ball entrance in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of distribution member drive control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the first non-electric accessary product drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the second non-electric accessary product drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the second main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the other main game variation control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game is finished on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of error management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flow chart of firing control signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flow chart of payout control board side main processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flow chart of error control processing upon detection of payout motor operation abnormality on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flow chart of error control processing when an abnormal payout is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flow chart of error control processing at the time of ball path abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flow chart of error control processing at the time of payout motor abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flow chart of error control processing when a payout stop abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flow chart of prize ball payout related information transmission/reception processing (to the main control board) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of prize ball payout control processing (at the start of prize ball payout/motor drive start) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of prize ball payout control processing (at the end of motor driving/at the end of prize ball payout) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of prize ball payout control processing (during motor drive execution) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of motor error processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flow chart of customization control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flow chart of customization guide screen display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 61 is a customizing guide screen image diagram 1 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flow chart of display control processing during customization execution on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 63 is a customizing guidance screen image diagram 2 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 64 is a customizing screen image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the occurrence probability for each occurrence frequency in the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 66 is an image diagram of customization during variation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of in-game customization control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flow chart of the first main game prefetch determination process on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 70 is a configuration diagram of a prefetch lottery table in the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flow chart of prefetch suspension content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 72 is an example of a pending change scenario determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flow chart of decoration symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of a pending change effect execution process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image diagram of holding change effect execution on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 79 is a game state transition diagram in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 80 is a timing chart of game state transitions and small wins in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 81 is an image diagram of the standby mode and rush mode display screens in the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 82 is an image diagram of the button effect during the jackpot game in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the flow rate of game balls in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 84 is a transition diagram of stages and stage levels in the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 85 is a timing chart of stage level up within one variation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 86 is an image diagram of the stage level-up before tenpai in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a lottery method for advance notice in a change in which the stage level increases in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 88 is an image diagram of stage level-up by a look-ahead effect in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 89 is a configuration diagram of a pattern lottery table for stage level-up by a look-ahead effect in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 90 is a timing chart of the annihilation effect in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 91 is an image diagram showing the flow of the annihilation effect when character A is selected in the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 92 is an image diagram showing the flow of the annihilation effect when character B is selected in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 93 is a configuration diagram of a chance scenario determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 94 is an image diagram showing the flow of chance numbers in the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 95 is an image diagram showing the flow of the effect of the pattern in which the chance eye ends in the middle in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 96 is an image diagram showing the flow of the effect of the pattern in which the display of the first chance is finished and revived in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 97 is a modified example of the configuration diagram of the prefetch lottery table in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of an example of changing the number of chances in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment.

form for implementation

First, the meaning of each term used in this specification will be explained. "Entering ball" includes not only prize winning in which a prize ball is paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" in which prize balls are not paid out. "Identification information" may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, such as numbers, letters, and patterns. and the like. In addition, in this specification, "identification information" may be referred to as main game design/special design (special design) or decoration design (design), but "special design (special design)" is the main control board The "decorative design (design)" is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. The term “identification information can be displayed” is not limited to any display method, and includes, for example, light emission from light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color), physical typical display (for example, a pattern drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). "Open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. Easy state. Also, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (on the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as a retracted state) ) (so-called tongue-type attacker), advance state=easy-win state, retreat state=non-easy-win state. “Random numbers” are random numbers used in lotteries (computer-based lotteries) to determine game content in pachinko machines, and include pseudo-random numbers in addition to strictly-defined random numbers (for example, random numbers are hard soft random numbers as random numbers, pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "random number (random number for lottery)" related to the transition to the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification pattern are determined. ``variation mode determination random number'' for determining the stop pattern, ``symbol determination random number'' for determining the stop pattern, and ``hit pattern determination random number'' for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the definite identification information, etc., but at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In this specification, the number of random numbers may be expressed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bunch of random numbers such as winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is called one random number) . Also, for example, one type of random number (for example, winning random number) may serve as another type of random number (for example, symbol determination random number). "Game state" means, for example, a special game state in which a large winning hole can be opened, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-probability variable game state in which the lottery probability of transition to the special game state is a predetermined value. Probability fluctuation game state with high lottery probability, shift to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize to the starting port that triggers the lottery (so-called normal pattern time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In some cases, it is an arbitrary combination of one or more of the following: long open period of variable members, high winning probability of open variable members, short notification time of lottery results for open variable members, and the like. Further, the "main variation display mode" is a variation mode related to the main game pattern determined by referring to the main game table 3 etc. In this example, the variation mode determined in the process of step 1410-4 and It's becoming "Probability variation gaming state" is also referred to as high probability, probability variation, and probability variation. The "auxiliary game state" is also referred to as a time reduction game state, a time reduction game state, or a high base. The “first decorative pattern” is a decorative pattern that is displayed so that the player can easily see it. The effects of the first decorative pattern are (1) it is possible to improve the interest of the performance during fluctuation, and (2) it is possible to notify the result of the game by the fixed stop display. "Second decorative design" is a decorative design that indicates that the game is changing at all times or when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative design or when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative design. The effects of the second decorative symbol are (1) that the result of the game can be notified by the fixed stop display, and (2) that it is possible to notify that the game is fluctuating. "Reach" is sometimes referred to as the reach state, reach display, or tenpai, and refers to the state in which two of the same decorative patterns are aligned. Mainly, the same decorative patterns are aligned in the left and right pattern rows. used when The “advancement effect” is a effect that suggests the expected degree of winning of the variation that occurs after the reach, which is also called reach effect, super reach (SP reach), super reach effect (SP reach effect), or the like. “Production” refers to display content that enhances the interest of the game, such as identification information change / stop, notice, etc., moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. A “stage (effect stage)” is also called a mode (effect mode), a zone (effect zone), or a background effect, and is an effect mode indicated by a background image. The effects of the stage (production stage) are (1) the ability to display (first decorative pattern, advance notice, etc.) corresponding to the stage, (2) the ability to suggest the degree of expectation for winning, and the like. "Temporary stop (temporary stop display)" means that the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and it appears that the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, but in fact, the decorative pattern is slightly moving (referred to as shaking fluctuation). (sometimes). The effects of the temporary stop (temporary stop display) are: (1) it is possible to make it appear that the change is being executed multiple times; whether it will be a hit without a fixed stop, or whether it will be changed to another decorative pattern without a fixed stop, etc.).

The following embodiment is a model (first class first class compound machine) in which two conventional first class pachinko game machines are mixed. However, it is not limited to this in any way, and it is within the scope even if it is applied to other game machines (for example, conventional type 1, type 2, type 3, pachinko game machines such as general electric players) . Note that this embodiment is only an example, and regarding the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. Moreover, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be combined in any way. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described. Further, in this embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limiting, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. In this example, the term "table" is not limited to its format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from among multiple selection candidates based on one or more pieces of information. It should be understood that it is a corresponding aspect. Furthermore, numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modified examples {for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol fluctuation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.} This is just an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, conditions between the first main game side and the second main game side, conditions between probability fluctuation games and non-probability fluctuation games, time reduction games and non- It is understood that the magnitude relationships and combinations of numerical values shown in the section "By conditions with time-shortened games, etc." Should. For example, between the 1st main game side and the 2nd main game side, the probability of winning at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game have a magnitude relationship between the 1st main game side = 2nd main game side. Even if it is exemplified as such, the magnitude relationship can be changed as appropriate such as the first main game side < the second main game side, or the first main game side > the second main game side. Good (same for other numerical values and conditions). Also, for example, when the number of continuations of the probability variable gaming state is configured based on the purpose of continuing until the next big hit occurs, is the number of continuations set to "65535" (configured to continue substantially)? Alternatively, even in the option of the implementation method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variable game state until the next big win occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modifications. should be understood to be subject to change as appropriate.

Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, referring to FIG. 1, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. A pachinko machine mainly consists of a machine frame and a game board. These will be described in order below.

First, the game machine frame of the pachinko game machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18 (door unit D18, glass door D18), an upper ball tray D20, a lower ball tray D22, and Includes firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko game machine to a position to be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame that matches the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for shooting game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, delivering game balls to the launch rail, extracting game balls to the lower ball tray D22, and the like. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. A speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball tray D20 and the lower ball tray D22 to output sound effects according to the game state and the like.

Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of mechanisms such as game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning openings, the first main game start opening (A10, A10-2), the second main game start opening B10, Auxiliary game starter H10, auxiliary game electric role E10, first non-electric role HD-1, second non-electric role HD-2, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20, first main Game pattern display device A20, second main game pattern display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game pattern display device H20, center decoration D38 (not shown) and out ports (D36, D36-2), general winning port P10 is installed. Each element will be described in detail below.

Next, the first main game starting ports A10 and A10-2 are installed as starting winning ports corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 is provided with a first main game start entrance detection device A11s, and the first main game start opening A10-2 is a first main game start entrance detection device. A11s-2 (not shown). Here, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game start entrance A10, and the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s-2. is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game start opening A10-2, and generates first main game start entry ball information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The first main game starter A10-2 is provided as a first non-electric accessory HD-1, and an auxiliary game electric accessory E10 (specific ball entrance) for opening the first non-electric accessory HD-1. When a game ball enters the first open ball entrance N1 in the distribution ball entrance C20), the first non-electric accessory HD-1 is moved from the closed state by a mechanical operating mechanism (not shown). It becomes an open state, and the game ball can enter the first main game start port A10-2. The first non-motorized accessory HD-1 is physically closed by the weight of the entered game balls when a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls enter the open state. The first non-electric accessory HD-1 and the second main game starter HD-2, which will be described later, are so-called second type non-electric accessories (also called mechanical chews), and are used for game balls that have won other winning slots. It is mechanically opened by the action, and closed by the entry of a game ball into the winning opening related to the second type non-motorized accessory (here, the first main game start opening A10-2 and the second main game start opening B10) It is a configuration that becomes

Next, the second main game starting port B10 is installed as a starting prize winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start opening B10 includes a second main game start opening ball detection device B11s. Here, the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball to the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generate entry ball information. The second main game starting port B10 is provided as a second non-electric role HD-2, and a second open ball in the auxiliary game electric role E10 for opening the second non-electric role HD-2. When the game ball enters the port N2, the second non-electric accessory HD-2 is opened from the closed state by a mechanical operating mechanism (not shown), and the game ball enters the second main game start port B10. A ball becomes possible. The second main game non-motorized accessory HD-2 is physically closed by the weight of the entered game balls when a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are entered after the second main game non-electric accessory HD-2 is opened.

Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 is provided with an auxiliary game starting port entering ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start hole H10, and generates auxiliary game start entrance ball information indicating the entrance ball at the time of entrance. do. It should be noted that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 serves as a trigger for a lottery for opening the auxiliary game electric accessory E10.

Next, the auxiliary game electric auditors E10 is provided with an auxiliary game electric auditors ball entry detection device E10s. Further, the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 has a sorting device FS, a first open ball entrance N1, and a second open ball entrance N2. A game ball entering the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is sorted by the sorting member FB of the sorting device FS so as to enter either the first open ball entrance N1 or the second open ball entrance N2. As described above, the first open entrance N1 is an entrance for opening the first non-electric accessory HD-1 from the closed state, and the second open entrance N2 is This is the entrance for opening the second non-electric accessory HD-2 from the closed state.

Next, on the upper right side of the out port D36, a first big prize winning port C10 and a second big prize winning port C20 are provided. , before reaching the out hole D36, it is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20 are arranged.

Next, the first big winning hole C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape which is opened when the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or the second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops as a big hit symbol. This is a prize winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right side of the exit opening D36. As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (and a first large winning opening An electric accessories solenoid C13) is provided. Here, the first big winning hole winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole C10, and the first big winning hole entering ball information indicating the ball entering the first big winning hole C10. to generate The first big winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big winning opening C10 between a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first big winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball easily wins (the first 1 big prize opening electric accessory solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is changed between a normal state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to win a horizontal rectangular shape and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize. is not limited to In that case, for example, a state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the big prize opening protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted toward the player side (so-called Tongue type attacker-), and an opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is used as a large winning opening, and the opening can be closed and opened (so-called slide attacker). This is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (eg, 10).

Next, the second big winning hole C20 is in the form of a horizontal rectangle which is opened when the second main game pattern (special pattern) stops with a small winning pattern, and is positioned above and to the right of the out hole D36. It is a prize winning slot corresponding to the main game. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20 includes a second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second large winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second large winning opening An electric accessories solenoid C23) is provided. Here, the second large winning opening detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening entry ball information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. to generate A game ball entered into the second big winning hole C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning hole winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d changes the second big winning hole C20 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second big winning hole C20 and an open state in which the game ball easily wins. variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is changed between a normal state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to win a horizontal rectangular shape and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize. is not limited to In that case, for example, a state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the big prize opening protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted toward the player side (so-called Tongue type attacker), or an opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is used as a large winning opening, and the opening can be closed and opened (so-called slide attacker). , is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10). It should be noted that the second big winning port C20 may be configured to be open even when the second main game symbols are stopped with other than the small winning symbols, for example, when the second main game symbols are stopped with the big winning symbols. good.

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is associated with the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes display, etc. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) and a first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g). A symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is provided. Here, the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is equal to the first main game (second main game). It corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". ” and ``-'' for failure {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game pattern is displayed. It is preferable to display by a symbol or the like using In addition, the display of the number of holds is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and is configured to be able to display the number of holds for up to four (for example, it is composed of one lamp, number 1: lighting, number of holds 2: flashing at low speed, number of holds 3: flashing at medium speed, number of holds 4: flashing at high speed}.

It should be noted that the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a role in production, so in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is used. is set to an inconspicuous size. However, by giving the first main game pattern (second main game pattern) itself a role of production, the first decorative pattern (composed of a plurality of elements such as characters and numbers, also called the main decorative pattern) and the second main game pattern In the case of adopting a method of not displaying decorative symbols (basically composed only of numbers, also referred to as sub-decorative symbols), the first main game symbols are displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device SG, which will be described later. (Second main game symbol) may be displayed.

Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes the display of effect images including decorative symbols that fluctuate and stop interlocking with the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which effects including variable display of decorative symbols are executed. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first suspension display portion SG12 (and a second suspension display portion SG13) that displays the main game suspension information, and a variation suggestion display portion that can suggest the degree of expectation for the big hit of the symbol variation being executed. SG14 and, for example, a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying moving images of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol variations imitating a slot machine game. In this embodiment, the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display, but may be composed of other display means such as mechanical drums or LEDs. Next, the first suspension display portion SG12 (and the second suspension display portion SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the suspension lamps of the main game symbols.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like regarding auxiliary game symbols. Specifically, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol reserve display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol reservation display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol variations pending (the number of auxiliary game symbol variations that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the performance display device SG, has a movable body accessory YK, and has functions such as the passage of game balls, the protection of the performance display device SG, decoration, and the like.

Next, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like. The game effect lamp D26 is also provided in the center decoration, and plays a role of performance by blinking.

Next, the general winning opening P10 is provided with a general winning opening winning detection device C21s. When the entry of the game ball is detected by the general winning opening prize detection device C21s, a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded.

Next, the sub-input button SB is an operation member electrically connected to the sub-control board S, which is operated (depressed) to execute an effect based on the operation. The modes of operation of the sub-input button SB include a single press (an operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is pressed only once for a short period of time), a continuous press (an operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is pressed multiple times), and a long press. (an operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is kept pressed for a predetermined period of time). The cross key SB-2 is electrically connected to the sub-control board S and has four operation units of up, down, left, and right. can be selected, and the notice can be configured to be customizable. Further, the operation members that are operated (depressed) to execute an effect based on the operation are not limited to the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2, and are electrically connected to the sub-control board S. In addition, it may be configured to have a lever that is pulled forward to execute an effect (activation of a movable accessory, etc.), a stick that is tilted back and forth, left and right, and the like.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine, and controls the overall game operation (i.e., the game A main control board M that performs control directly related to the interests of players), and a sub-main control unit SM that performs display control etc. related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content. A sub-sub control unit SS that executes performance display, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a prize ball that pays out game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT according to winning to each prize opening to the upper ball tray D20. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10, etc., a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation of the prize ball payout unit KE10, and a game ball (storage ball) in the upper ball tray D20 are placed in the game area. A firing control board D40 that controls the firing operation of a firing device D42 that fires balls one at a time to D30, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine, and a switch that turns the power of the pachinko game machine on and off. A certain power switch Ea and the like are provided on the rear surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

Next, referring to FIGS. 3 and 4, the structure of the prize ball payout unit KE10 of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment and the principle of operation for paying out game balls will be described. First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 3, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a payout motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) KE10m driven at the time of payout. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 3, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a sprocket KE10p connected to the stepping motor KE10m. The prize ball payout unit KE10 having such a structure operates according to the following principle. First, when a game ball enters a winning hole in the game area, a winning signal is sent to the main control board M, the main control board M determines the number of payouts, and a prize ball signal is sent to the prize ball payout control board KH. do. Alternatively, a request for ball lending is made from the game ball lending device such as the card unit R to the prize ball payout control board KH. In response to this, the prize ball payout control board KH operates the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10 executes game ball payout. As shown in FIG. 4, the rotation of the stepping motor KE10m rotates the sprocket KE10p (a member in which the first sprocket KE10p1, the second sprocket KE10p2, and the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 are integrated), and the game ball rotates. One ball is paid out. In addition, the paid out game balls are detected by a payout count sensor KE10s continuously provided downstream of the prize ball payout unit KE10. It should be noted that the cross section C-C is a cross section along the flow path of the game ball (the flow path is easy to see).

Further, the lower part of FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a rotor position confirmation sensor (payout motor position sensor) KE10ms and a rotating body (sprocket) KE10p (an example). The rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is a photosensor that has a pair of measurement units and detects an object between the measurement units by light projection and reception. Here, the pair of measurement units are a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and are arranged with the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 interposed therebetween. Here, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 has six concave portions formed along the circumference, and is turned off when the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is interposed between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion. When the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is not interposed between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion, it is turned on (state shown in the lower part of FIG. 3).

Next, a schematic electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, has a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, and pays out game balls based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to control and the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, a sub-main control section SM and a sub-sub-control section SS are arranged on one board) for controlling lighting of the game effect lamp D26, execution of error notification, etc.; and a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire game machine including the control board. are provided at appropriate locations.

The sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stoppage of decorative patterns, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. , a sub-sub control unit SS for executing display processing such as variable display/stop display of decorative symbols on the effect display device SG, suspension display, and advance notice display.

Here, the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that pre-stores a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, A RAM is provided to temporarily store data handled by the CPU (various data generated during games, computer programs read from ROM, etc.). Schematic configurations of the substrates and electrical connections between the substrates and devices will be described below.

First, the main control board M includes electric members for each first main game-related electric member, electric members for each second main game-related electric member, electric members for each first and second shared main game members, and each auxiliary game-related electric member. It is electrically connected to an electric member (input/output device) essential for the progress of the game, such as an electric member, and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. The electric members of each main game-related electric member and auxiliary game-related electric member will be described later. Further, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control section SM, sub-sub control section SS), and prize ball payout is performed based on the progress of the game. etc. to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) to the sub control board S about the performance/game progress state and the like. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown). It is configured to be able to output game-related information from to an external device.

In addition, in this embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. The control section SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control section SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used for the communication method). Communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH includes a prize ball payout device KE for executing game ball payout, and a device that can be operated by a player and receives a game ball lending request and sends the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a launch control board D40 that controls the game ball lending device R that transmits and the launching device (handle unit HU100, ball launching unit BU100, etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is separated and adjacent to the gaming machine. However, it may be integrated with the gaming machine. Control and management control of recording media for lending electronic money or the like may be performed in an integrated manner.

Next, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying decorative patterns, advance notice effects, etc., a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and is configured to change the effect execution mode by operating the button effects. A sub-input button configured so that the settings of the game machine can be changed (details will be described later) by operating on the customization execution screen, volume control screen, light intensity control screen, etc. SB and cross key SB-2 are connected. In this embodiment, as described above, the sub-control board S has the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS. The lighting control of the decoration lamp D26, the determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device SG, and the display control of the effect based on the operation of the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are performed. , display control on the effect display device SG. In this embodiment, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as separate boards). (Although it may be possible to do so, there are merits such as a space merit and a reduction in the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Also, the division of work between the two controllers can be appropriately changed, for example, the sub-sub-controller SS executes voice control (preferable when adopting a VDP integrated with a voice control circuit). Also, instead of giving physical prize balls as prize balls, electronic values may be given. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control section SM are based on the results of the game, including the variation of the decorative symbols in time synchronization with the variation of the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols. It concerns the display of only non-influential information.

Next, the game-related electric member will be explained. As shown in the figure, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as game-related electrical members, a first main game-related electrical member A, which is a game-related electrical member on the first main game side, and a second main game side 2nd main game-related electric member B, which is a game-related electric member, and 1st and 2nd main game-related electric member C, which is a game-related electric member shared by the first main game side and the second main game side and an auxiliary game-related electric member H, which is a game-related electric member on the auxiliary game side. The main control board M is connected to these first main game-related electric member A, second main game-related electric member B, first and second main game shared electric member C, and auxiliary game-related electric member H. electrically connected. The main control board M supplies control signals, drive signals, etc. to the first main game-related electric member A, the second main game-related electric member B, the first and second main game common-related electric members C, and the auxiliary game-related electric members H. , or output from the first main game-related electric member A, the second main game-related electric member B, the first and second main game shared electric member C, and the auxiliary game-related electric member H Various signals such as sensor signals are input to the main control board M. These game-related electrical members will be described in order below.

First, the first main game-related electrical member A is an electrical member related to the first main game. For example, as the electric member of the first main game-related electric member A, a first main game symbol display device A20 capable of displaying the first main game symbols in a stationary and variable manner, or entering a ball into the first main game starting port A10. There is a first main game start entrance detection device A11s (first main game start entrance detection device A11s-2) that can detect. The main control board M outputs a control signal to the first main game symbol display device A20. In addition, the detection signal output from the first main game start entrance detection device A11s (first main game start entrance detection device A11s-2) is input to the main control board M.

Next, the second main game-related electrical member B is an electrical member related to the second main game. For example, as an electric member of the second main game-related electric member B, a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of displaying the second main game symbols in a stationary and variable manner, or entering a ball into the second main game start port B10. There is a second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s that can detect . The main control board M outputs a control signal to the second main game symbol display device B20. Also, the detection signal output from the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s is input to the main control board M.

Next, the common electric member C for the first and second main games is an electric member related to both the first main game and the second main game. For example, as the first and second main game common electric member C, the first big prize opening electric accessory solenoid C13 (not shown) of the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize of the second big prize opening C20 There is an electric accessory solenoid C23 (not shown) and the like. In addition, as the first and second main game common electric member C, the first big winning hole winning detection device C11s which is a sensor for detecting the entry of the game ball into the first big winning hole C10, and the second big winning hole There is also a second big winning opening winning detection device C21s, which is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into C20. The main control board M outputs a drive signal to the first big winning opening electric accessory solenoid C13 and the second big winning opening electric accessory solenoid C23. Sensor signals outputted from the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s and the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s are inputted to the main control board M.

Next, the auxiliary game-related electric member H is an electric member related to the auxiliary game. For example, as the auxiliary game-related electrical member H, a solenoid (not shown) for driving the second main game starter electric accessory B11d provided in the second main game starter B10, stop display and change of the auxiliary game pattern There are an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 that can display, an auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s that can detect an entrance ball to the auxiliary game start hole H10, and the like. The main control board M outputs a drive signal to the solenoid that drives the second main game starter electric accessory B11d, and outputs a control signal to the auxiliary game symbol display device H20. In addition, the detection signal output from the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s is input to the main control board M.

The electrical members of the first main game symbol display device A20, the electrical members of the second main game symbol display device B20 and the electrical members of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be capable of transmitting information. . Also, the electric members constituting the effect display device SG are connected to the sub-main control section SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the performance display device SG is controlled by the sub-main control section SM. means It should be noted that another game peripheral device may be controlled via another control board controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication) with the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 6 is a main flow chart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. As shown in FIG. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. 1(a) is executed. That is, after power-on of the game machine and initial setting (not shown), in step 1001, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch provided on the main control board M is off. judge. If Yes in step 1001 , the process proceeds to step 1002 . If No in step 1001 (when the setting key switch is operated), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the processing of step 1003 (setting change processing, which will be described later), and shifts to the processing of step 1004. . At step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button (also called reset button, RAM clear switch, setting change button, etc.) provided on the prize ball payout control board KH, It is determined whether or not the RAM clear button has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation to intentionally clear the contents of the RAM has been performed by the manager of the game arcade or the like. If Yes at step 1002, at step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted at this timing). (Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted in a control command transmission process, which will be described later), and the process proceeds to step 1015 . On the other hand, if No at step 1002, at step 1007, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not information indicating that the power has been turned off normally is stored in the RAM. In the case of Yes in step 1007, in step 1008, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the comparison with the amount of information). Next, at step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is correctly backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clearing process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1007, that is, information indicating that the power has been turned off normally is stored in the RAM, or if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, The CPUMC of the main control board M acquires various information commands stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M, and at step 1014, sends the acquired various information commands to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It may be transmitted at that timing, or it may be configured to set a command at that timing and transmit it in the control command transmission process described later), and in step 1014-1, the main control The CPUMC of the board M restores the solenoid return setting {auxiliary game electric accessory E10, large winning opening (for example, first large winning opening C10, second large winning opening C20) to the state before power off In order to return, it is determined whether or not the solenoid operation bit is on in the order of the electric accessory and the large winning opening. store the solenoid operation flag in the corresponding address} to open the solenoid again}, and the process proceeds to step 1015. At step 1015, the CPUMC of the main control board M saves in the RAM information indicating that the power has been turned on normally, and proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M is triggered by a timer interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every approximately 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) is permitted {as a result, (b) of FIG. transition to After step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number updating processes (for example, random number counter incrementing process) until the next timer interrupt timing is reached.

In this example, the game machine has a plurality of setting values, but the correspondence between the operation mode of the setting change button and the change of the setting value of the game machine can be freely designed. For example, if the number of setting values is 6 (the setting value is one of "1" to "6") and the setting value at power-on is "6", pressing the setting change button once , the setting value becomes "5", and if the setting change button is operated three times, the setting value becomes "3". ” (Similarly, the setting value may be sequentially moved up from “1” to “6” according to the number of times the setting change button is operated). Also, in this case, if the setting value is "1" and the setting change button is operated once, the setting value becomes "6". The setting value may be changed to the upper limit value when the button is operated. Similarly, according to the number of times the setting change button is operated, the setting value is incremented. , the set value may be changed to the lower limit value (“1” in this example). Alternatively, the setting values may be changed sequentially by pressing the operation button for a long time.

The setting change button and the RAM clear button may be provided as separate operation members, or one operation member may serve both as the setting change button and the RAM clear button.

The number of setting values can be freely designed as appropriate, for example, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and the like. The smaller the number of set values (for example, when the number of set values is 2 or 3), the more interesting the game based on having a plurality of set values is and the simpler the configuration of the game machine is. As the number of setting values increases (for example, when the number of setting values is 5 or 6), the game becomes more interesting.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing. When the setting change process is started, a command indicating the start of the setting change process is set and transmitted to the sub control board S in step 1003-1. As a result, the sub-control board S can display, for example, "in setting change mode" on the effect display device. At the same time, it is output to the external terminal board as an outer end signal (security signal). At step 1003-2, it is checked whether the set value (set value data) is within the normal range ("1" to "6"), and if Yes, the process proceeds to step 1003-4. If No in step 1003-2, that is, if the set value (set value data) is determined to be an abnormal value other than "1" to "6", the minimum payout rate is set in step 1003-3. A value (set value data) of "1" is set, and the process proceeds to step 1003-4. In step 1003-4, a special symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20 or second main game symbol display device B20 may be called in a display mode (for example, full lighting) indicating that the setting is being changed. ) is turned on, and at the same time, the current set value is displayed on the set value display device provided on the main control board M. Next, in step 1003-5, it is confirmed whether or not there is an input from the setting change button, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1003-11. If Yes at step 1003-5, at step 1003-6 the setting value data switched by the setting change button is obtained, and the process proceeds to step 1003-7. At step 1003-7, it is checked whether or not the current set value (set value data) is not the maximum value. to add. If No in step 1003-7, that is, if it is determined that the set value (set value data) is the maximum "6", the minimum payout rate of "1" is set in step 1003-8. At the same time, the process proceeds to step 1003-9, and 1 is added to the set value (set value data). Subsequently, in step 1003-10, the set value data is updated, and in step 1003-11, it is checked whether or not there is a fall of the set key signal. At step 1003-11, if there is no fall of the setting key signal, the processing proceeds to step 1003-5, and the processing from step 1003-5 to step 1003-11 continues until the fall of the setting key signal is confirmed. repeat. In the case of Yes in step 1003-11, that is, when it is determined that the setting key switch has returned to the state before the setting change, all the LEDs of the special symbol display device are turned off in step 1003-12, and the setting is being changed. After clearing the display mode indicating that the setting change process is completed, a command is set and transmitted to the sub-control board S in step 1003-13. As a result, the sub-control board S hides the message "setting change mode in progress" being displayed on the effect display device, and stops the output to the external terminal board. After the processing of step 1003-13 is completed, the processing shifts to step 1004 of this processing, and RAM clear is executed. It should be noted that, throughout the entire process, the setting value data managed by the RAM has been described using "1" to "6", but the setting value data "0" to "5" may be substituted for the processing. . In this way, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM abnormality, the abnormality determination (No in step 1003-2) due to setting "0" to the value of the RAM that manages the set value data can be avoided. can be done. If the set value data is managed as "0" to "5" (at this time, in the case of three-step setting, it is managed as "0" to "2"), "0" is treated as set value data. Therefore, it is not judged to be abnormal. Furthermore, when some kind of lottery is performed using set value data (for example, when different data is selected for each set value in a look-ahead table or the like), there is an advantage that offset processing in table selection is easy to perform. Specifically, when setting value data is managed with "1" to "6", when using it as it is as offset data for table selection, it is necessary to perform processing such as subtracting 1 from the start address. When the value data is managed with "0" to "5", the value can be used as it is as the offset data. When actually displaying the set value data on the set value display device, the set value data is displayed as "1" to "6" by adding 1 to the set value data.

In this example, in step 1003-2, it is determined whether or not the set value (set value data) is within a normal range, in other words, the set value (set value data) is confirmed. However, as the execution timing of the confirmation process,
(1) Timing immediately after turning on the power (2) Timing of entering a ball into a predetermined opening (3) Timing of entering a ball into a main game starting opening (4) Timing of entering a ball into an auxiliary game starting opening (5) Big win Timing of entering the ball into the mouth (6) Main game pattern fluctuation start timing (7) Timing immediately after the game state is switched (8) Timing immediately after the start of the big win (9) Timing immediately after the end of the big win Execute at the above timing. good too. Note that the setting value (setting value data) confirmation process may be executed only at one of the above nine timings, or the setting value (setting value data) confirmation process may be executed at a plurality of the above nine timings. A confirmation process may be performed. For example, since it is configured to execute checksum processing when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to provide a process to check only the set values (set value data). The setting value data) may be configured so as not to execute the confirmation process.

Next, FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board M. As shown in FIG. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the processing shown in FIG. That is, with the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt at approximately 1.5 ms intervals) as a trigger, in step 1000-S, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes setting key operation determination processing, which will be described later. , the process proceeds to step 1000-1.

The setting key operation determination process determines whether or not the setting key switch has been operated (whether the setting key is input to the setting key insertion port, and whether the key switch for changing the setting is in the ON state). or not, etc.). When it is determined that the setting key switch has been operated in the setting key operation determination processing in the timer interrupt processing (i.e., the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port and the setting key is rotated in a predetermined direction). When the key switch for changing the setting is in the ON state, the current setting value of the game machine is displayed on a predetermined display device (in this example, the setting value display device).

Next, at step 1000-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes input processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1000-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes various random number updating processes, which will be described later. Next, at step 1000-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an initial value update type random number update process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1000-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an initial value random number update process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1000-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes timer subtraction processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1000-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the starting port 2 validity period setting process (processing for setting the validity period of the second main game starting port B10), which will be described later. Next, at step 1000-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes winning monitoring processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 3000, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes prize ball payout command transmission control processing, which will be described later. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins in each winning port is 3 balls from the first main game start port A10, 1 ball from the first main game start port A10-2, and 2 balls from the second main game start port B10. is 1 ball, auxiliary game electric accessory E10 (distribution ball entrance C20) is 1 ball, 1st big prize mouth C10 is 15 balls, 2nd big prize mouth C20 is 5 balls, left general prize mouth (general prize mouth ) has 10 balls, and the right general winning opening P20 (not shown in FIG. 1, etc.) has 10 balls. It should be noted that these prize ball payout numbers are examples, and the number of prize ball payouts in the case of entering the first main game start port A10 and in the case of entering the second main game start port B10 may be the same or different. Alternatively, the number of prize balls to be paid out may be the same or different between when the ball enters the first big prize hole C10 and when the ball enters the second big prize hole C20. However, the number of winning balls in all the winning holes provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example does not exceed 15 for one winning (winning ball), and is constant regardless of the game state (abnormal (Except when it is invalidated due to circumstances or an error), and is configured so that prize balls are not paid out except for winning prizes, realizing various game states. , the direct result of the game is summarized as "whether or not the shot game ball wins a prize in a predetermined winning hole".

In this example, since the specific prize ball payout control process is performed by the prize ball payout control board KH instead of the main control board M, the main control board M manages the progress of the payout control in real time. However, if there is an accident such as a power failure during payout of one game ball, the correct number of prize balls may not be delivered. For this reason, in this example, a retry function in the event of an abnormality that again pays out game balls for the winning prize (for example, when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 and one game ball is paid out , and after that, after the power is restored, the remaining 3 game balls are paid out). Of course, by providing a backup function to the prize ball payout control board KH, it is possible to realize the correct number of prize ball payouts even when such an abnormality occurs. No function is required.

Next, at step 2000, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a ball entry detection process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric accessary product drive determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1250, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes distribution member drive control processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1280, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first non-electric accessory drive control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1290, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second non-electric accessory drive control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes main game content determination random number acquisition processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process which will be described later. Next, at step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a small winning game symbol control process which will be described later. Next, at step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process which will be described later. Next, at step 1601, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a big winning opening validity period setting process. Next, at step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes special game operation condition determination processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1550-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes abnormality detection processing. Next, at step 1550-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the incoming ball passing time abnormality detection process. Next, at step 1550-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game state display process. Next, at step 1550-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the handle state signal inspection process. Next, at step 1550-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an out port monitoring process. Next, at step 1550-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes LED output processing. Next, at step 1900, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes fraud detection information management processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1950, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes error management processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1550-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes firing control signal output processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1550-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes test signal output processing. Next, at step 1550-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes solenoid output processing. Next, at step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control section side). Next, at step 3500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes external signal output processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1550-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets to permit the generation of timer interrupts, and returns to the processing that was being executed immediately before execution of this interrupt processing.

The input process is a process of determining a signal input to the main control board M from an input device such as a sensor and setting a flag or the like corresponding to the signal. Switch (for example, 1st main game start entrance detection device A11s, A11s-2, 2nd main game start entrance detection device B11s, auxiliary game start entrance detection device H11s, 1st big winning entrance winning detection device C11s, second big winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device, auxiliary game electric accessory entering ball detecting device E10s, etc.), first open ball opening that detects the ball entering the first open ball opening N1 Ball entry sensor, second open ball entry sensor that detects a ball entering the second open ball entry N2, out ball count switch that detects a ball entering the out exit (D36, D36-2), disconnection Short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, open signal (for example, front frame D14, door D18, etc.), magnetic detection signal 1 (detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 1), radio wave detection signal, impact detection signal, touch state signal, and magnetic detection signal 2 This is a process of monitoring the input of (a detection signal by the magnetic detection sensor 2). In this example, for a special input such as a RAM clear switch, input determination and the like are performed by a process different from the input process.

Various random number update processing is a process of relatively simply updating (for example, adding a constant) the random number used for lottery that has an extremely low impact on the ball output. , Auxiliary game symbol variation mode random numbers) and variation pattern random numbers (for example, variation mode lottery random numbers) are updated.

The initial value update type random number update process is a process of updating the random numbers used in the lottery that has a certain amount of influence on the ball output (a process different from the various random number update processes described above). Random numbers per symbol (for example, random numbers for winning auxiliary game symbols), random numbers for normal symbols (for example, random numbers for stopping symbols for auxiliary game symbols), random numbers for special symbols (for example, random numbers for lottery symbols), software random numbers for special symbols, etc., to be described later. It is a process for

The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the random number for determining the initial value of the random number updated by the initial value update type random number update process used in the lottery that has a certain degree of impact on the ball output. As an example of the random number to be updated in the example, an initial value random number per normal design, a normal design design initial value random number, a special design design initial value random number, and a soft initial value random number per special design can be exemplified. Incidentally, the normal per symbol initial value random number and the normal symbol symbol initial value random number are random numbers that are updated by the initial value random number update process when a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers are provided.

The timer subtraction process is a process of updating a 2-byte timer (eg, first and second main game symbol variation management timers, electric accessory release timers, special game timers, release time timers, etc.).

The starting port 2 effective period setting process is a winning opening (for example, the second main This is the process of setting the validity period of the game start port B10).

The prize-winning monitoring process is a process of updating the passage counter of the switch, creating a security output request to be output to the external terminal board, and requesting transmission of a command to be transmitted to the effect control board.

The large winning opening effective period setting process is a process of saving the result of determining the valid period of the large winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20). In addition, when the specific area C22 is provided in the special winning opening, the result of valid period determination of the specific area C22 may be saved by the special winning opening valid period setting process.

The abnormality detection process is a process of monitoring magnetism, disconnection/short circuit, power source monitoring, radio wave monitoring, opening/closing state of glass frame set/game board D35, impact monitoring, and the like.

The ball passing time abnormality detection process is to detect the ball passing time abnormality when the game ball enters various ball entrances (for example, the first main game start opening A10). This is the process of monitoring the ON time (continuous ON time of the entering ball sensor).

The game state display process includes the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously (the number of rounds executed in the big hit), the error state, the number of balls that are suspended in operation of the normal symbol display device (currently displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 Auxiliary game reserved ball number) and operation reserved ball number of special symbol display device (current main game reserved ball number displayed on first main game pattern display device A20 or second main game pattern display device B20) display request This is the process of performing

The handle state signal inspection process is a process of monitoring the touch state of the firing handle (for example, the firing handle D44).

The out-port monitoring process is a process of monitoring the out-port (for example, the out-port D36) in order to create a security output request.

The LED output process means display on the special symbol display device (for example, display of the first main game symbol on the first main game symbol display device A20, display of the second main game symbol on the second main game symbol display device B20, display of the second main game symbol on the second main game symbol display device B20, 1. Display of the number of operation pending balls on the first main game side on the main game symbol display device A20, display of the number of operation pending balls on the second main game side on the second main game symbol display device B20), display on the normal symbol display device (Display of auxiliary symbols in the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, display of the number of operation pending balls on the auxiliary game side in the auxiliary game symbol display device H20), display of error state, display of game state, display of hitting (for example, right In order to display the situation that you should hit and the situation that you should hit left) and the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously (display the number of rounds in the big hit), initialization and display of the display This is a process of sequentially controlling the LED output controlled on the main control board M side, such as data output.

The shooting control signal output process is a process of outputting a signal for prohibiting or permitting shooting of game balls, and the details will be described later.

The test signal output process is a process of creating a signal to be output to a test device outside the game machine and outputting it to the corresponding output port.

Solenoid output processing is to output the output data of the normal electric accessory (eg, auxiliary game electric accessory E10) solenoid and the large winning opening (eg, first large winning opening C10, second large winning opening C20) solenoid processing.

Next, FIG. 9 is a main flow chart showing the flow of NMI interrupt processing (at the time of power failure) performed by the main control board M. As shown in FIG. First, NMI interrupt processing will be described. A power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU of the main control board M, and the process shown in FIG. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), at step 1019-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a timer interrupt is occurring. If Yes at step 1019-1, at step 1019-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not information indicating that the power has been turned on normally is stored in the RAM. On the other hand, if No in step 1019-1, the process of step 1019-1 is performed again. If Yes at step 1019-2, at step 1019-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M saves information indicating an abnormal power failure in the RAM, and proceeds to the next step 1022. On the other hand, if No at step 1019-2, at step 1019-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M saves information indicating normal power-off in the RAM, and at step 1020, the main control board M The CPUMC sets power failure information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, at step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing. Although an example in which the power interruption process (FIG. 9) is executed by inputting the power interruption signal to the NMI terminal of the CPU has been described, this is not restrictive, and the power interruption signal may be input to a specific input port. It is also possible to determine power interruption by monitoring a specific input port in main control board side main processing (FIG. 6) or timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8), and perform power interruption processing. Power interruption may be referred to as power interruption, and power interruption processing may be referred to as power interruption processing, power interruption processing, or power interruption processing.

Next, FIG. 10 is a flow chart of prize ball payout command transmission control processing according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. First, at step 3100, the main control board M executes a payout control board transmission control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3200, the main control board M executes a payout control board reception control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2000).

Next, FIG. 11 shows a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. First, at step 3105, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout signal is OFF, that is, whether or not the payout is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there are undistributed prize balls (prize balls for which the prize ball disbursement command has not yet been transmitted to the prize ball disbursement control board KH side). determine whether In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the CPUMC of the main control board M generates a prize ball payout-related error that is an error inappropriate for the prize ball payout (for example, an error related to a payout motor failure, an , out-of-ball error, etc.) has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a prize ball payout command for the number of prize balls to be paid out corresponding to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the current payout process is executed (see FIG. 12). ). Then, in step 3125, the CPUMC of the main control board M erases the undistributed prize ball information corresponding to the prize ball disbursement command set this time, and executes processing for shifting subsequent information. Next, in step 3130, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the set prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and shifts to the next process (the payout control board reception control process of step 3200). do. Note that even if No in steps 3105, 3110, and 3115, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3200).

Next, FIG. 13 shows a flow chart of the payout control board reception control process according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. First, at step 3205, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout-related information has been received. Here, in the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that error information (out-of-ball error, upper tray full error, other payout-related error) exists in the received payout-related information. Determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the error flag related to the error, and the error information on the prize ball payout control board KH side is transmitted to the main control board M side. But manage (unified management). On the other hand, if No at step 3210, at step 3220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the error flag associated with the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Then, in step 3225, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the received payout-related information includes prize ball payout completion information. In the case of Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set prize ball payout command (prize ball payout command associated with the completion of this payout), and proceeds to the next process (step 2000). process). Note that even if No in steps 3205 and 3225, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2000).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flow chart of the entering ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. First, at step 2100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game electric accessory entry detection process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game start entrance ball detection process which will be described later. Next, at step 2350, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first (second) big winning hole entry detection process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a general winning hole entrance ball detection process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a discharged ball detection process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an out-hole entrance ball detection process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes prize ball determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1100).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flow chart of auxiliary game start entrance ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the auxiliary game start entrance detection device H11s is the entrance detection time (this time or more, the auxiliary game start entrance detection device H11s When detects the input, it determines whether or not it is ON for the time when it is considered that there is a ball entering the auxiliary game start port H10. If Yes in step 2104, in step 2106, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start flag. Next, in step 2108, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2150).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2110, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the auxiliary game start entrance detection device H11s is detected over the detection end time (this time or more, the auxiliary game start entrance detection device If H11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for the time considered to have passed through the auxiliary game start entrance entrance ball detection device H11s. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2150). Note that even if No in step 2104 or step 2110, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2150).

Next, FIGS. 16 and 17 are flow charts of the main game starting entrance ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port (first main game start port A10) detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the first main game start entrance detection device A11s is the entrance detection time (this time or more, the first main game start entrance When the ball detection device A11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for the time considered to have entered the first main game start port A10. In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start flag. Next, at step 2208, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the number-of-balls counter value. Next, at step 2210, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start opening detection continuation flag. Next, at step 2211, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the starting entrance ball number counter, and proceeds to step 2216.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2212, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the number-of-entered-balls counter has exceeded the detection time (this time or longer, the first main game start entrance-entered ball detection device A11s has If it is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for the time considered to have passed through the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start opening detection continuation flag. Next, at step 2215, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2216. It should be noted that even if No in steps 2204 and 2212 , the process proceeds to step 2216 .

Next, at step 2216, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start opening confirmation sensor has detected a game ball. In the case of Yes in step 2216 , the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the first main game start opening confirmation counter value in step 2218 and proceeds to step 2220 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2216 , the process proceeds to step 2220 .

Next, at step 2220, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port (A10-2) detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2220, in step 2224, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the first main game start gate (A10-2) ball entry detection device When the game start port (A10-2) ball detection device detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for the time considered to have entered the first main game start port A10-2. In the case of Yes at step 2224, at step 2226, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start flag. Next, at step 2228, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the number-of-balls counter value. Next, at step 2230, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start port (A10-2) detection continuation flag. Next, at step 2231 , the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the starting entrance entrance ball number counter, and proceeds to step 2242 .

On the other hand, if No at step 2220, at step 2232, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the number-of-entered-balls counter has reached the detection time (this time or longer, the first main game start port (A10-2) entered ball detection If the device does not detect an input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for the first main game start opening (A10-2), the time considered to have completed passing through the entering ball detection device) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2232, in step 2234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start port (A10-2) detection continuation flag. Next, at step 2235, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start port (A10-2) long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2242. It should be noted that even if the results of steps 2224 and 2232 are No, the process proceeds to step 2242 .

Next, at step 2242, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start opening detection continuation flag is OFF. In the case of Yes in step 2242, in step 2244, the second main game start entrance ball determination means determines that the input from the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s When the game start opening detection device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for the time considered to have entered the second main game start opening B10. In the case of Yes in step 2244, in step 2245, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag during the second main game start opening valid period is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2245, at step 2246, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start flag. Next, at step 2248, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the number-of-balls counter value. Next, at step 2250, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2260.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2245 (when the entry of the game ball into the second main game start port B10 is not valid), in step 2251, the CPUMC of the main control board M It is determined that there is an unauthorized ball entry to the second main game start opening B10, the second main game start opening unauthorized ball entry command (command to the sub control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2260. It should be noted that even if No in step 2244 , the process proceeds to step 2260 .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2242, in step 2252, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the second main game start entrance detection If the ball detection device B11s does not detect an input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for the time considered to have passed through the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s. In the case of Yes at step 2252, at step 2254, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start opening detection continuation flag. Next, at step 2258, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2260. It should be noted that if the result of step 2252 is No, the process also proceeds to step 2260 .

Next, in step 2260, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the first main game start opening (A10, A10-2) entry detection device (second main game start entry detection device B11s) is fraudulent detection time ( It is determined whether or not it is ON for the time exceeding the time that is detected as a normal ball entry and the time for determining that fraud is being performed. In the case of Yes in step 2260, in step 2262, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) main game start opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2260, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350).

Next, FIG. 18 is a flow chart of the first (second) big winning hole entrance ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, at step 2352, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) big winning opening detection continuation flag is OFF. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) As described above, when the ball-entering detection device detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for a period of time during which it is assumed that a ball has entered the relevant ball-entering hole. In the case of Yes at step 2354, at step 2355, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag during the first (second) big winning opening valid period is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2355, at step 2356, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) big winning hole entering ball flag. Next, at step 2358, 1 is added (incremented) to the number-of-balls counter value. Next, at step 2360 , the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) big winning opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2370 .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2355 (when the entry of a game ball into the large winning opening is detected during the period in which the entry of a ball into the large winning opening is not valid), in step 2361, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects an illegal entry into the large winning opening. Then, the first (second) big winning hole illegal ball entry command (command to the sub control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2370 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2354 , the process proceeds to step 2370 .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2352, in step 2362, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the input from the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) {the time As described above, when the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) does not detect the input, the game ball detects the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning detection device C11s). It is determined whether or not it has been OFF for the time considered to have completed passing through the detection device C21s). If Yes at step 2362, at step 2364, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) big winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, at step 2368 , the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) big winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2370 . On the other hand, if No in step 2362, the process proceeds to step 2370 as well.

Next, in step 2370, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) When the winning opening detection device C11s (the second big winning opening detection device C21s) detects an input, the time when it is assumed that the illegal entry into the first big winning opening C10 (the second big winning opening C20) is detected. } It is determined whether or not it is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2370, at step 2372, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) big winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2370, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flow chart of the general winning hole entrance ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. In addition, the general winning opening (the left general winning opening P10 and the right general winning opening P20 may be collectively referred to as the general winning opening) pays out prize balls when a game ball enters. , which does not affect the progress of the game (does not execute a lottery that affects the progress of the game). A general winning gate ball detection device P11s, which is a sensor for detecting a game ball entering the left general winning gate P10, and a general winning gate ball detecting device P11s, which is a sensor for detecting a game ball entering the right general winning gate P20. It has a detection device P11s and two general winning entrance ball detection devices P11s).

First, at step 2402, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the general winning entrance ball detection device is within the ball entrance detection time (this time or more, the general winning entrance ball detection device detects the input). Then, it is determined whether or not the switch is ON for a period of time during which it is assumed that a ball has entered the general winning hole. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning hole entry ball flag. Next, at step 2408, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the number-of-balls counter value. Next, at step 2410, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning hole detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2412, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general prize winning entrance detection device is the detection time of the ball (this time or longer, the general winning entrance detection device inputs is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for the time considered to have passed through the general winning entrance ball detection device. If Yes at step 2412, at step 2414, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning hole detection continuation flag. Next, at step 2418, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2420. It should be noted that even if No in steps 2404 and 2412 , the process proceeds to step 2420 .

Next, in step 2420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general winning entrance ball detection device is the fraud detection time {if the general winning entrance ball detection device detects the input for this time or more, the general winning A determination is made as to whether or not the switch is ON for a period of time for which it is assumed that an illegal ball into the mouth has been detected. In the case of Yes at step 2420, at step 2422, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process at step 2500). Note that even if No in step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, at step 2502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the total discharge when the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for the ball entry detection time (this time or more, and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input). It is determined whether or not the sensor C90s is ON for a period of time during which it is assumed that a ball has been hit. If Yes at step 2504, at step 2506, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the ejection confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2508, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2520).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2510, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s has not detected the input for the detection end time (this time or more). In this case, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time considered to have passed through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s. If Yes at step 2510, at step 2512, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2514, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge confirmation long time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2520). It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2520).

Next, at step 2520, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is ON for the fraud detection time or longer. If Yes at step 2520, at step 2522, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge confirmation long time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process at step 2600). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2520, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

Next, FIG. 21 is a flow chart of the out-going ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, at step 2602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the outlet detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the out entrance ball detection device D36s is detected for the ball entrance detection time (this time or more, the out entrance entrance detection device D36s detects the input). Then, it is determined whether or not the ball is ON for a period of time during which it is assumed that a ball has entered the out hole D36 or the upper out hole D36-2. If Yes at step 2604, at step 2606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the outlet detection continuation flag, at step 2608, adds 1 to the counter value of the number of entering balls, and proceeds to the process at step 2620. .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2602, in step 2610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the out entrance ball detection device D36s is detected until the detection end time (this time or longer, the out entrance entrance ball detection device D36s does not receive the input). If it is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for the time considered to have passed through the out entrance ball detection device D36s. If Yes at step 2610, at step 2612, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the outlet detection continuation flag. Next, at step 2615 , the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the outlet long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2620 . On the other hand, if step 2604 or step 2610 is No, the process proceeds to step 2620 as well.

Next, in step 2620, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the out-door entrance ball detection device D36s is for the tampering detection time (if the out-door entrance ball detection device D36s detects the input for the time or longer) , the time during which it is assumed that a ball is illegally entered into the out hole D36 or the upper out hole D36-2). In the case of Yes at step 2620, at step 2622, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the outlet long time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process at step 2700). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2700).

Next, FIG. 22 is a flow chart of the number-of-prizing-balls determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, at step 2702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the first main game start opening (A10). If Yes at step 2702, at step 2704, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls paid out related to the first main game start port A10 (3 in this example) to the counter value of the number of prize balls counter. do. Next, in step 2708, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information on the number of prize balls to be paid out) to the effect that prize balls are to be paid out from the first main game start port A10, and step 2709. -1. On the other hand, if No in step 2702, the process also proceeds to step 2709-1.

Next, at step 2709-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the first main game start opening (A10-2). If Yes at step 2709-1, at step 2709-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball counter to the number of prize balls paid out related to the first main game start port A10-2 (this example Then add 1). Next, in step 2709-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information relating to the number of paid-out prize balls) to the effect that the prize balls relating to the first main game start port A10-2 are to be paid out. and go to step 2712 . On the other hand, if No in step 2709-1, the process proceeds to step 2712 as well.

Next, at step 2712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start flag is ON. If Yes at step 2712, at step 2714, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls paid out (1 in this example) to the counter value of the number of prize balls counter. do. Next, in step 2718, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information on the number of prize balls to be paid out) to the effect that the prize balls are to be paid out from the second main game start port B10, and step 2720. transition to On the other hand, if No in step 2712, the process proceeds to step 2720 as well.

Next, in step 2720-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 (distribution ball entrance C20) has entered. If Yes at step 2720-1, at step 2720-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls paid out (1 in this example) to the counter value of the number of prize balls counter. do. Next, at step 2720-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information on the number of paid-out prize balls) to the effect that the prize balls related to the electric accessory are paid out, and shifts to step 2722. do. On the other hand, if No in step 2720-1, the process proceeds to step 2722 as well.

Next, at step 2722, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) big winning hole entry flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2722, at step 2723, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) big winning hole entry flag. Next, in step 2724, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball counter to the number of prize balls paid out (15 in this example) related to the first big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20. The number of prize balls to be paid out (5 in this example) is added. Next, in step 2728, the CPUMC of the main control board M provides information to the effect that the prize balls related to the first big winning hole C10 (second big winning hole C20) will be paid out (for example, information related to the number of paid out prize balls). is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2722 as well, the process proceeds to step 2732 .

Next, at step 2732, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning hole entry flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2732, at step 2733, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning hole entry ball flag. Next, at step 2734, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls paid out (10 in this example) to the counter value of the prize ball counter. Next, at step 2738, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information on the number of prize balls to be paid out) to the effect that prize balls are to be paid out for the general winning hole, and the next process (step 1100) is performed. process). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2732, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100).

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered (flowed in, or passed through in the case of a gate) the auxiliary game starting port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the auxiliary game start opening ball entry command, which is a command related to entering the auxiliary game start opening H10, to the sub-main control unit SM. command transmission buffer (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1110. FIG. Next, at step 1110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of retained balls is the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes at step 1110, at step 1112, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1114, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the retained ball by setting it in the RAM area of the main control board M together with the information indicating what number the ball is retained. processing of step 1200). Note that even if No in steps 1104 and 1110, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Here, in the present embodiment, since the auxiliary game starter H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball entering the auxiliary game starter H10 (passing through the auxiliary game starter H10) continues on the game board surface. As it flows down, it can enter the ball entrance (large winning opening etc.) downstream from the auxiliary game starting opening H10, while the game ball entering the big winning opening flows down to the back of the game board surface, After that, it is configured not to enter other entrances. Even if the game ball enters the auxiliary game starting hole H10 (the game ball passes through the auxiliary game starting hole H10), the prize balls are not paid out.

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the electric accessary product drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, at step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory open flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol fluctuating flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 1204, at step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time saving flag), and refers to the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table, Determine the stop symbol based on the obtained auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol winning random number based on the reserved ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, it is higher than when it is off) Winning symbols are selected with probability) and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M.

Here, the right side of the same figure is an example of the lottery table for determining the auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, there are "D0, D1" as the stop symbols, and "D1" is the stop symbol as the winning symbol. The open mode of the electric accessary that is different is that when the stopped symbol is "D1" during a non-time reduction game, the open mode is (open for 1.6 seconds → closed for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.2 seconds open → closed). Further, in the time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds→close for 1.6 seconds→open for 5.8 seconds→close). Although the probability is almost the same, the stop symbol is likely to be a losing symbol "D0" during a non-time shortening game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a winning symbol "D1" during a time shortening game.

Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the timer for auxiliary game design variation management based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag) to the predetermined time related to the auxiliary game design fluctuation time. Time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, 1.1 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, at step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol fluctuating flag. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the holding information recorded in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game pattern, After starting the game symbol variation management timer, the auxiliary game symbol variation display is started on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer to determine whether or not the predetermined time related to the auxiliary game symbol variation time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbols and confirms and displays the acquired stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. do. Then, at step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol fluctuating flag. Next, at step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit" (D1 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the opening mode based on the game state and the winning pattern on the auxiliary game side, and sets the electric auditors opening timer to the electric auditors opening time ( opening/closing time) is set. Next, at step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory open flag. Then, at step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M releases the auxiliary game electric accessory E10, and proceeds to step 1242. It should be noted that even if No in step 1202 , the process proceeds to step 1242 .

Next, in step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the electric accessory opening timer and determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory has reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in steps 1244 and 1246, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the auxiliary game electric role product E10, turns off the electric role product open flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 1300 process).

If No at step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. If No at steps 1206, 1224, 1230, and 1242, the next process (process of step 1250) is performed.

Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, the process proceeds to the next step immediately after displaying the stop symbol in step 1226, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixing time of about 500 ms (for example, this process may be performed by branching using the stop display fixing flag and timer. achievable). In addition, there may be a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers, auxiliary game symbol winning random number for determining the success or failure of the auxiliary game, auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number for determining the stop symbol of the auxiliary game pattern, auxiliary game symbol Auxiliary game symbol variation mode random numbers or the like for determining the variation time may be provided.

Although not shown, in one opening operation of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 (opening operation based on the stop of the symbol per auxiliary game), the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 has a predetermined number of game balls ( For example, 10 balls) is configured to end the opening operation of the auxiliary game electric role item E10, that is, the opening time of the auxiliary game electric role item E10 ends, or the auxiliary game electric role When the game balls of the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) enter the auxiliary game electric role product E10 during the opening period of the object E10, whichever comes first, the auxiliary game electric role product E10 is opened (opened) period) is configured to end. In addition, the total time during which the normal electric accessories are open in the non-time-reduced game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag on) is 1.8 seconds, and the time during which the normal electric accessories are open in the time-reduced game state The total is 6.0 seconds, and in any game state, the maximum opening time for one time does not exceed 6 seconds, and the maximum winning number during operation does not exceed approximately 10. It is predetermined for each game state (whether it is a time-reduced game state or a non-time-reduced game state).

In addition, in this example, when the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) which is the trigger for the operation of the normal electric role (auxiliary game electric role E10) is confirmed and displayed in the winning mode, immediately (for example, the shortest (within 500 ms, which is shorter than the pattern fluctuation time), and it is clearly associated with which trigger the normal electric accessory is operating. In addition, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from winning during the closing operation of the normal electric accessory (auxiliary game electric accessory E10) (during the operation of opening → closing), the normal electric accessory (auxiliary game The driving source (solenoid) is selected so that the electric accessory E10) returns to the non-operating state in a short period of time, so that the game ball won more than necessary and is not greatly different from the ball design. It has become.

Next, FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 (distribution ball entrance C20). Inside the auxiliary game electric accessory E10, a first open ball entrance N1 (first open ball entrance entrance ball a detection device N1s), and a second open ball entrance N2 (second open ball entrance ball detection device N2s) that opens the second non-electric accessory HD-2 when a game ball enters. , and a distribution member FB for distributing game balls entering the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 to the first open ball entrance N1 and the second open ball entrance N2.

First, if the distribution member FB is in the first mode, it is swung to the right so as to block the flow path to the first open entrance N1. , A game ball entering the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is configured to easily enter the second open ball entrance N2 and difficult to enter the first open ball entrance N1. Next, a detailed description of the operation shown in the lower part of the figure will be made. When the distribution member FB is in the second mode, it is swung to the left so as to block the flow path to the second open entrance N2. A game ball that enters the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is difficult to enter the second open ball entrance N2 and is configured to easily enter the first open ball entrance N1. Also, as will be described later, the distribution member FB is configured to start driving from the first opening timing when the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is opened, and to be driven like "first mode → second mode". ing.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the distribution member driving control process according to the subroutine of step 1250 in FIG. First, in step 1250-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the distribution member driving flag (the flag that turns on while the distribution member is being driven based on the release of the electric accessary) is off. determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 1250-1, in step 1250-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M reaches the first opening timing of the electric accessory (from the timing when the electric accessory is first opened, the distribution member drive is started). In the case of Yes in step 1250-2, in step 1250-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the initial value (7.6 in this example) to the distribution member drive timer (decrement timer) and starts it. Next, at step 1250-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution member driving flag, and proceeds to step 1250-5. Note that even if No in step 1250-1, the process proceeds to step 1250-5. Next, in step 1250-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the distribution member drive timer value has reached the drive switching timing (timer value=5.8) (the distribution member drive timer is the decrement timer). Therefore, it is determined whether the distribution member driving timer value at the timing of 1.8 seconds from the start of driving the distribution member is 5.8). If Yes at step 1250-5, at step 1250-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the distribution member from the first mode to the second mode (the initial position is the first mode), Move to the next process. If No in step 1250-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution member drive timer value is 0 in step 1250-7. If Yes at step 1250-7, at step 1250-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the distribution member from the second mode to the first mode. Next, at step 1250-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution member driving flag, and proceeds to the next process. If No in step 1250-2 or 1250-7, the process proceeds to the next step.

Next, the middle part of FIG. 26 is a working diagram of the electric accessory and the distribution member. First, the distribution member FB is driven from the first mode (initial position) to the second mode at a predetermined timing (1.8 seconds from the start of driving). Here, in the case of the non-time-reduced game state, the electric accessory is long open during the period in which the distribution member is in the first mode (1.6 seconds, which is the first half of the opening period of the electric accessory described above). (opening), making it easier to enter the game ball. On the other hand, in the case of the time reduction game state, the electric accessary is long open during the period in which the distribution member is in the second mode (5.8 seconds, which is the second half of the opening period of the electric accessary described above). ), and is configured to facilitate entry of game balls. The lower part of FIG. 26 is a table showing the opening mode of the electric accessory and the displacement mode of the distribution member. As described above, the opening pattern of the electric role is that when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, the total opening time or the maximum opening time (in the case of multiple openings) of the electric role is higher than when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off. It is longer, and it is relatively easier to enter the game ball into the distribution entrance (auxiliary game electric accessory E10) when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on than when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off. It's becoming In addition, as described above, the distribution member guides the game ball to enter the second open entrance N2 in the case of the first mode, and guides the game ball to enter the first open entrance N2 in the case of the second mode. A game ball is guided to enter the ball opening N1. In addition, although not shown, in the case of the non-reduced time gaming state, the state in which the distribution member is driven in the second mode (the state in which the timer value of the distribution member drive timer is between 5.8 and 0 ), the opening start timing of the electric accessory may be newly reached, so the electric accessory open flag in step 1246 in the electric accessory drive determination process shown in step 1200 is turned off, and at the same time the distribution member is set to the first mode , and the timer value of the distribution member driving timer may be initialized.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the first non-electric accessary product drive control process according to the subroutine of step 1280 of FIG. First, in step 1280-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first non-electric accessory open flag (first non-electric accessory opening/closing detection attached to the opening/closing portion of the first non-electric accessory HD-1). When the sensor is in the non-detection state (off), it is determined whether or not the flag that is turned on by judging that the first non-electric accessory HD-1 is being opened is off. If Yes at step 1280-1, at step 1280-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first open ball entrance N1. In the case of Yes in step 1280-2, in step 1280-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first non-electric accessory open flag. Also, in the case of No in step 1280-1, in step 1280-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M, when the first non-electric accessory open/close detection sensor is turned on from off, the first main game start port (A10-2) Whether or not a predetermined number of balls (the number of balls that cause the first non-motorized accessory HD-1 to physically close due to the weight of the game ball, 2 in this example) have entered determine whether In the case of Yes in step 1280-5, in step 1280-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M does not satisfy the error occurrence condition (in this example, when the first non-electric accessory closes (the first When the electric accessory open/close detection sensor changes from off to on), only 1 ball is entered into the first main game start gate (A10-2), or 4 balls are entered Irregular It is determined whether or not an event in which it is determined that a prize-winning operation or an opening/closing operation has been performed is observed multiple times. In the case of Yes in step 1280-6, in step 1280-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first non-electric accessary product open flag, and proceeds to the next process. Note that if the result of step 1280-5 or step 1280-2 is No, the process proceeds to the next step. If No in step 1280-6, an error is reported in step 1280-9, and error processing is executed (error recovery conditions include, for example, elapse of a predetermined period of time for anomaly reporting, turning off the power supply, etc.). off→on, RAM clear, etc.), and the process proceeds to step 1280-8.

Next, FIG. 28 is a flow chart of the second non-electric accessary product drive control process according to the subroutine of step 1290 of FIG. First, in step 1290-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the second non-electric accessory opening flag (the second non-electric accessory opening/closing detection attached to the opening/closing portion of the second non-electric accessory HD-2). When the sensor is in the non-detection state (off), it is determined whether or not the flag that is turned on by judging that the second non-electric accessory HD-2 is being opened is off. If Yes at step 1290-1, at step 1290-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the second open ball entrance N2. If Yes at step 1290-2, at step 1290-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second non-electric accessory open flag. In addition, in the case of No in step 1290-1, in step 1290-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M, when the second non-electric accessory open/close detection sensor is turned on from off, the second main game start port It is determined whether or not a predetermined number of balls (in this example, 2 balls in this example) are the number of balls that cause the second non-motorized accessory HD-2 to physically close due to the weight of the game ball. . In the case of Yes in step 1290-5, in step 1290-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M does not satisfy the error occurrence condition (in this example, when the second non-electric accessory closes (second When the electric accessory opening/closing detection sensor changes from off to on), irregular prize-winning behavior such as only one ball entering the second main game start port B10 or four balls entering, It is determined whether or not an event in which it is determined that an opening/closing operation has been performed is observed multiple times. In the case of Yes in step 1290-6, in step 1290-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second non-electric accessary product open flag, and proceeds to the next process. Incidentally, even if No in step 1290-5 or step 1290-2, the process proceeds to the next step. If No in step 1290-6, an error is reported in step 1290-9, and error processing is executed (error recovery conditions include, for example, elapse of a predetermined abnormality reporting period, turning off the power supply, etc.). off→on, RAM clear, etc.), and the process proceeds to step 1290-8.

Next, FIG. 29 is a flow chart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the first main game start entrance ball information from the first main game start entrance entrance detector A11s (first main game start entrance entrance detector A11s-2). is received. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (especially the first main game side) is not the upper limit (eg 4). In the case of Yes at step 1304, at step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random numbers, the winning lottery random number for determining winning or losing, the symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for doing are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means with different update cycles and random number ranges, and are obtained in succession at this timing. Next, at step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number. Next, at step 1310, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M pre-judges the winning/failing results and the stop symbols related to the stored pending based on the pending information (win/fail lottery random numbers and symbol determination random numbers). Next, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command relating to the result of the new hold approval/disapproval and the pre-determination result of the stop symbol information to the command transmission buffer for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1318. FIG.

Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M pre-determines the variation mode group related to the stored suspension based on the suspension information (variation mode determination random number) (as for the variation mode group, the main game table 3), go to step 1320. In this embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). It should be noted that even if No in step 1310 or step 1312 , the process proceeds to step 1320 . Next, at step 1320, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a command related to the occurrence of a new hold (a command related to the occurrence of a hold of the first main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode group command, etc.) to the sub-main control unit It is set in the command transmission buffer for transmission to SM (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1322. FIG. Incidentally, when the symbol information is transmitted to the sub control board S side as in the present embodiment, the effect to be executed on the sub control board S side may be an effect suggesting a big hit. In this case, it is desirable to have a structure capable of notifying the player of the stop pattern of the main game pattern that will be the big hit (the stop pattern is notified only when the stop pattern of the main game pattern is the big hit). Also, in the case of No in step 1302 or step 1304, the process proceeds to step 1322 as well. Although the first main game content determination random number is temporarily stored in step 1308, the processing related to the first main game content determination random number will be described in detail. (1) First main game start port A10 (A10-2) Triggered by the entry of a ball into the ball, the first main game content determination random number is obtained, and the random number is stored in a register. (2) The first main game content determination random number stored in the register is stored in the RAM of the main control board M, and the variation of the main game symbols is started based on the first main game content determination random number stored in the register. Pre-reading lottery is executed before. (3) When the main game symbols start to fluctuate, the first main game content determination random number stored in the RAM of the main control board M is stored in the register, and based on the first main game content determination random number stored in the register. (It may be determined based on the first main game content determination random number stored in the RAM of the main control board M). Incidentally, if the second main game side is configured to be able to execute the prefetching lottery, it may be configured to execute the same processing for the second main game content determination random number.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation mode group is determined when the main game content determination random number (first main game content determination random number or second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when suspension occurs). ing.

In addition, at the timing when the suspension occurs, the main game content determination random number information and the variation mode group information may be transmitted to the sub control board S side, but the information to be transmitted to the sub control board S side is Not limited to this, information related to the stop pattern of the main game pattern, information related to the profit mode of the main game pattern that will be a big hit (number of special game rounds related to the main game pattern to be stopped, etc.), immediately after the reserved winning (It may be only the number of reservations on the winning side of the first main game side or the second main game side, or the number of reservations on both the first main game side and the second main game side), etc. may be configured to transmit

Next, at step 1322, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start entrance ball information has been received from the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s. In the case of Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (especially the second main game side) is not the upper limit (eg 4). In the case of Yes at step 1324, at step 1326, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random numbers, three random numbers are obtained as in the case of the first main game pattern determination means: win/fail lottery random numbers, symbol lottery random numbers, and variation mode lottery random numbers. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number for the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range for each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning lottery random number for the first main game and the winning lottery random number for the second main game acquisition range) are set to the same. Next, at step 1328, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number. Next, at step 1330, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1330, in step 1334, the CPUMC of the main control board M prejudges the win/fail results and stop symbols related to the stored hold based on the hold information (win/fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1336, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command relating to the result of the new pending decision and the result of advance determination of the stop symbol information to the command transmission buffer for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM. (Sent to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1338. FIG.

If No in step 1330 , the process proceeds to step 1340 .

Next, in step 1338, the CPUMC of the main control board M pre-determines the variation mode group related to the stored suspension based on the suspension information (variation mode determination random number) (as for the variation mode group, the main game table 3) and go to step 1340 . Next, at step 1340, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a command related to the occurrence of a new hold (a command related to the occurrence of a hold of the second main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode group command, etc.) to the sub-main control unit It is set in the command transmission buffer for transmission to SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and the next processing (processing of step 1400) is performed. Also, in the case of No in step 1322 or step 1324, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

In this embodiment, as a result of the preliminary determination, the second main game side is configured to transmit a command related to the variation mode group. It may be configured not to transmit. In other words, as a result of the preliminary determination, only the command related to the result of the winning/failure and the result of the preliminary determination of the stop symbol information may be transmitted.

In steps 1308 and 1328, the first main game content determination random number and the second main game content determination random number are stored. is stored, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only the information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte that stores the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers It is preferable to configure it so that other information such as value is not stored (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise etc.). to prevent it from being lost). In addition, regarding the success or failure lottery random number, the change in the game state (the change in the game state related to the already recorded suspension) from the acquisition of the success or failure random number to the execution of the success or failure lottery related to the success or failure lottery random number Not only the change, but also the possibility that the game state will change due to the newly generated hold, the game state at the time of execution of the lottery lottery related to the lottery random number is unpredictable). is configured to store the lottery random number until it is executed. In this embodiment, the command to the sub-main control unit SM related to the hold information is a hold related to the first main game or a hold related to the second main game in any game state. However, the command to the sub-main control unit SM related to the hold information is transmitted only when the hold related to the first main game occurs in the non-time-reduced game state. On the other hand, even in the time shortening game state, as shown in the game state transition diagram to be described later, it is mainly composed of holding digestion related to the first main game, so it is configured so that it can be transmitted only when a hold related to the first main game occurs. good too. In the present embodiment, when the random number for determining the content of the first main game is stored, the special game is not being executed, the game is in a non-time-reduction game state, and furthermore, the pattern fluctuations related to the second main game. It is configured to transmit to the sub-control board S side information on the win/fail result, the stop pattern, and the variation mode group related to the new hold when the variation display for the big hit is not executed as the display.

Next, FIG. 30 is a flow chart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) relating to the subroutine of the main game symbol display process in FIG. This drawing is constructed so that a so-called parallel lottery can be executed in which main game symbols of both the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols are drawn in parallel. Since this process is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, at step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbols to be controlled are not in the main game pattern fluctuation, and the main game symbols to be controlled A hold must exist. Although not shown in this example, if a variable fixed time (time to stop and display the finalized display pattern after the main game pattern is confirmed) is provided, during the variable fixed time, the next fluctuation start condition may be configured so as not to satisfy

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current pattern variation. is read out, deleted from the pending information, and the remaining temporarily stored information is shifted (holding digestion processing). Next, at step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game winning/failure lottery table (second main game winning/failure lottery table) corresponding to each game state, and selects the first main game contents. Based on the determined random number (second main game content determined random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number), the main game pattern winning lottery is executed.

Here, FIG. 31 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game winning/failure lottery table (second main game winning/failure lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability variable gaming state is higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability variable gaming state (=variable probability). . It should be noted that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this at all.

Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table), Based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number), the stop symbols relating to the main game symbols are determined and temporarily stored.

Here, FIG. 32 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "α1, α2, α3" and "β1, β2, β3") It is configured such that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. Incidentally, the number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbols is all 10R. In addition, the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples and are not limited to these {for example, the lost symbols are not limited to one type of symbol, and may be configured to provide multiple types of symbols. may}

Next, in step 1410-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table) corresponding to each game state, Based on the game symbol lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, the variation mode lottery random number), the variation mode of the main game symbols is determined, and these are applied to the main control board M. Temporarily store in the RAM area.

Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 is an example of the lottery table for determining the first main game variation mode (lottery table for determining the second main game variation mode). As shown in this figure, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbols with respect to a certain random value can be determined based on the result of the lottery of the main game symbols and the state of the main game time saving flag. It is For example, with respect to a certain random number, if the result of the lottery of the main game pattern is a hit, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and if the main game time saving flag is on (time saving game state) is configured such that a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short is easily determined. Note that this example is merely an example, and the type of variation mode (variation time), selectivity, and the like are not limited in any way. In addition, in FIGS. 33 to 35, a variation mode group is provided even in situations where information related to the variation mode group is not transmitted to the sub control board S side (game state etc.), but it is not limited to this, the sub It may be configured such that the variation mode group is provided only in the situation of transmitting to the control board S side. Also, regarding the main game time reduction flag, which of the main game probability change flag (flag that operates during the high probability state) and the auxiliary game time reduction flag (flag that operates during the advantageous game state on the auxiliary game side) operates at the same time Accordingly, the type of main game for shortening the fluctuation time may be changed, or any one of a plurality of main game time reduction flags may be selectively activated. For example, when the auxiliary game time saving flag is activated, the lottery table for determining the first main game variation mode is set to be easy to determine the short time variation mode for the time saving game, and the main game probability variation flag is on ( During a high probability game) and when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off, the lottery table for determining the second main game variation mode is set so that the short time variation mode for the time saving game is easily determined.

Next, at step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a command related to the temporarily stored main game symbols (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, variation mode information, etc.) and a command related to the current game state ( symbol variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer for transmission to the sub-main control section SM (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, at step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first and second main game symbol variation management timers to a predetermined time period related to the variation time of the main game symbols. Next, at step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g), according to the temporarily stored variation mode, the variation display of the main game symbols is started. Next, at step 1418, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the in-fluctuation flag, and proceeds to step 1419-1.

Next, in step 1419-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game time saving flag is on (=high base).

In the case of Yes in step 1419-1, in step 1419-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the current variation will result in a big hit in the first main game symbol (variation that will result in a big hit in the second main game symbol) ).

If Yes in step 1419-2, in step 1419-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag (that is, low base), and proceeds to the processing of step 1422.

On the other hand, if No in steps 1419-1 and 1419-2, the process proceeds to step 1422 as well.

On the other hand, if No at step 1403, at step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuating flag is on. If Yes in step 1420, the process proceeds to step 1422. If No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next step.

Next, at step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbols has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 1422, at step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation is finished. It is set in the buffer (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, at step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) The variable display of the main game symbols is stopped, and the temporarily stored stop symbols are displayed and controlled as fixed stop symbols. Next, at step 1426, a command (a command for transmission to the sub side) relating to the information indicating that the symbol has been stopped is set. Next, at step 1428, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the fluctuating flag.

Next, at step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If Yes at step 1430 , at step 1432 , the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 3350 .

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1430, at step 1434, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is a small winning symbol. In the case of Yes at step 1434 , at step 1436 , the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag and proceeds to step 1500 . If No in step 1434 , the process also proceeds to step 3350 .

Next, at step 3350, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the other main game variation control process, which will be described later.

Next, at step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes specific game end determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next processing. Note that even if the answer to step 1420 is No, the process proceeds to the next step.

It should be noted that, in the case of No in step 1419-2, the specific game end determination process of step 1500 may be executed.

With this configuration, for example, in the case of ST100 times, when the ST100 variation (losing) in one main game pattern is fluctuating, the 101st variation in the other main game pattern starts to fluctuate. can be selected by lottery with a low probability.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the other main game variation control process according to the subroutine of step 3350 in FIG. This process is executed when the stopped main game symbol is a big win symbol or a small win symbol. First, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means, and determines whether or not the stopped main game symbol is the first main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3352, in step 3354, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means, and determines whether or not the second main game symbol is fluctuating. do. In the case of Yes at step 3354, at step 3356, the CPUMC of the main control board M forcibly stops the second main game symbol during the fluctuation due to a loss, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3352, at step 3358, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means to determine whether the first main game symbol is fluctuating. determine whether or not In the case of Yes at step 3358, at step 3359-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is a small winning symbol. In the case of Yes at step 3359-1, at step 3360, the CPUMC of the main control board M suspends the changing first main game symbol and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3359-1 (=when the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol), the first main game symbol during the change is forcibly stopped due to a loss, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). . Note that even if No in step 3354 or step 3358, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). In addition, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped first main game symbol is configured to resume the fluctuation after the small hit related to the stopped second main game symbol is completed. It is configured to be stopped based on the winning lottery result and the symbol lottery result drawn before the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, when the first main game jackpot symbols are stopped in the non-time shortening game state (low base state), if the second main game symbols are fluctuating, the second main game symbols in the fluctuating Since the variation time of the second main game symbols is long and the big win related to the second main game symbols should not be executed, the second main game symbols during the variation are forcibly stopped due to the loss, and the time is not shortened. When the second main game small winning symbols are stopped in the gaming state and the first main game symbols are fluctuating, the first main game symbols during the fluctuation are temporarily stopped.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flow chart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the probability variation counter and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the probability variable number counter by 1 (decrement). For example, when the probability variation continues substantially until the next big hit, the probability variation number counter is set to 10000 times, and 1 is subtracted (decremented) for each variation. In the case of Yes in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the probability variation counter and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes at step 1506 , at step 1508 , the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation flag and proceeds to step 1510 . It should be noted that even if No in step 1502 or step 1506 , the process proceeds to step 1510 .

Next, in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time-saving counter and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time saving counter. Next, at step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time-saving counter and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes at step 1514, at step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time saving flag. Next, at step 1518, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag, and proceeds to the next process. It should be noted that even if No in step 1510 or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next step. In addition, as described above, the main game time saving flag is divided into a plurality of types based on the combination of on or off of the two flags, the main game probability variable flag and the auxiliary game time saving flag, or the target main game pattern is changed. In this case, the processing shown in step 1516 is not performed, and after the end of step 1518 (or when the result is No in step 1510 or when the result is No in step 1514), the main game time reduction is performed according to the result of confirming both flags. It may be configured to perform a process of changing the type of the flag or changing the main game symbol targeted by the main game time saving flag.

Next, FIG. 38 is a flow chart of small hit game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1701, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a discharge standby flag {a flag that is turned on in step 1722 to be described later, that is, a scheduled small winning game (especially, a scheduled second After the execution of the opening pattern of the winning opening C20) is completed, the flag that is turned on during the discharge waiting period (discharge waiting time) of the game balls remaining in the second big winning opening C20 is turned off. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1701, in step 1702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, in step 1705, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the opening pattern of the second big winning opening C20 of the round (in this example, for example, in all small winning symbols, "open for 1.8 seconds → close" (In order to increase the expected value of entering a ball during a small hit, it may be opened or closed multiple times with short opening and closing times, depending on the shooting interval of the game ball and the relationship with the upstream winning opening, etc. It is preferable to configure the total opening time to be within 1.8 seconds), and if the game ball continues to be shot toward the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening C20 The game ball is configured to enter multiple balls). The opening mode of the big winning hole (second big winning hole C20) during execution of the small win can be arbitrarily set. may be appropriately configured to be a predetermined time or less (for example, 1.8 seconds or less). Next, at step 1706, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1707, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a small winning execution start command (a command to the effect that a small winning game has started), and directs the player to shoot a game ball toward the second big winning opening C20. ) is set in the command transmission buffer for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, in step 1708, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second big winning hole C20 and starts a small-hit game timer (the timer value is counted down). Next, at step 1709, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts a discharge standby timer (increment timer), and proceeds to step 1712. In addition, the discharge standby timer measures the elapsed time from the start of the small win game, and is configured so that the discharge standby time ends after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the small win {Of course, the measurement of the discharge standby time The method is not limited to this, and for example, measurement may be started after execution of a scheduled small winning game (particularly, a scheduled opening pattern of the second big winning hole C20) is completed}.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is ON. If Yes in step 1710 , go to step 1712 .

Next, at step 1712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize (entered a ball) in the second big prize winning opening C20. In the case of Yes in step 1712, in step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there are a predetermined number (for example, 3) of winning balls in the second big winning hole C20. If Yes in step 1714 , go to step 1718 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1712 or step 1714, in step 1716, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the small winning game timer and determines whether or not a predetermined time related to opening the big winning opening has passed. . If Yes at step 1716 , go to step 1718 .

Next, at step 1718, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops the driving of the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d to close the second big winning opening C20. Next, at step 1722, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge standby flag (the discharge standby time starts from the execution timing of this process), and the process proceeds to step 1724. It should be noted that even if No in step 1701 , the process proceeds to step 1724 .

Next, at step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value has reached the discharge waiting time end value. If Yes at step 1724, at step 1725, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the discharge standby timer to zero. Next, at step 1726, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge standby flag. Next, at step 1728, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops and resets the timer for the small hit game. Next, at step 1730, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag and proceeds to the next process. Incidentally, even if No in step 1710, step 1716 or step 1724, the process proceeds to the next step.

Here, in this example, the maximum number of winning prizes set as a program for one small win is 3, and the maximum opening time of the big winning hole for one small win is 1.8 seconds or less (more specifically Specifically, the opening mode of the big prize mouth when executing a small win is set to a series of opening and closing operations of "open for 1.8 seconds → close"), and one of the closing conditions is achieved. It is controlled so as to close the big winning opening in the case. Here, in order to suppress excessive prize winning and minimize the divergence from the design value of paid balls, it is desirable to perform control so as to close immediately after the closing conditions are met. On the other hand, even if such processing is performed, the ball enters the big winning hole immediately after the closing condition is met, or the winning ball stays in front of the count sensor (the winning ball is detected by the count sensor after the closing condition is met). to do) is also considered. Therefore, in either case after the maximum opening time has passed or after the maximum number of winnings has been exceeded, the winning is processed as a valid winning only under predetermined conditions (within a predetermined period after closing). It is desirable to

Next, FIG. 39 is a flow chart of special game control processing relating to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, at step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is ON. If Yes at step 1602, at steps 1604 and 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, at step 1607, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, at step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is to be started in the command transmission buffer for transmitting to the sub-main control section side ( (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612. FIG.

On the other hand, if No at step 1602, at step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is ON. Then, if Yes in step 1610 , the process proceeds to step 1612 . Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the special game is not permitted, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1601).

Next, at step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not each round is about to start. If Yes in step 1612, that is, if it is just before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads the set opening pattern (for example, opening pattern that keeps opening, pattern that opens and closes). to set. Next, at step 1616, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter to zero. Next, at step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d (or the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d) to drive the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C10). The special game timer (especially the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, the first big prize opening: 30 seconds, the second big prize opening: 1.8 seconds) and started. , go to step 1622 . On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the first big prize winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processing of steps 1614-1620.

Next, at step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command related to the current special game (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) to the side of the sub-main control unit SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, at step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter, and a predetermined number (for example, the first It is determined whether or not there are 10 balls for the big prize, and 3 balls for the second big prize. If Yes at step 1624 , go to step 1628 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer (especially the opening time timer) for a predetermined time (for example, the first big winning Exit: 30 seconds, 2nd big prize opening: 1.8 seconds). If Yes at step 1626 , the process also proceeds to step 1628 . If No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1601).

Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops the driving of the first big winning mouth electric accessory C11d (or the second big winning mouth electric accessory C21d) and the first big winning mouth C10 (or Close the second big prize winning opening C20). Next, at step 1630, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets the special game timer (especially the opening time timer). Next, at step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, at step 1633, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, at step 1634, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means has reached the maximum number of rounds). exceeded). In the case of Yes at step 1634, at step 1636, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, at step 1638, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is to end in the command transmission buffer for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, in step 1650, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1601). Note that even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1601).

Next, FIG. 40 is a flow chart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, at step 1651, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a symbol for the probability variation game. In the case of Yes in step 1651, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (10000 times in this example) to the probability variation counter. Next, at step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag. On the other hand, if No in step 1651 , the process proceeds to step 1655 .

Next, at step 1655, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a symbol for a time reduction game (high base). In the case of Yes at step 1655, at step 1656, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30, 60, 10000 times, etc.) to the time saving number counter. Next, at step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag. Next, at step 1660, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1601). In addition, as described above, in order to make the main game time saving flag different depending on the combination of other flags (main game probability variable flag, auxiliary game time saving flag), or to switch the target main game according to the game state, It may be configured to switch the content of the data set in the main game time saving flag according to the type of hit. For example, the 1-byte data configured as the main game time saving flag is configured to have a bit that turns on when the main game probability variable flag is on and a bit that turns on when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, Depending on whether the two bits are "0" or "1", it may be configured to vary the control contents of the time saving game state (auxiliary game state).

Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, at step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability variable flag/main game time reduction flag). Next, at step 1556, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the probability variation counter. Next, at step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the time saving counter. Next, at step 1564, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, at step 1566, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-1). Incidentally, even if No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-1).

Next, FIG. 42 is a flow chart of fraud detection information management processing related to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the unauthorized radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the unauthorized radio wave sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row (for example, this processing is timer interrupt processing). This is the process executed in , and it is intended to remove the influence of noise by determining whether or not it is continuously ON in a predetermined number of interrupts. In the case of "predetermined number of consecutive times", it has the same meaning). If Yes at step 1902 , at step 1904 , the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that unauthorized radio waves have been detected, turns on the unauthorized radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912 . On the other hand, if No at step 1902, at step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the unauthorized radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the unauthorized radio wave sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in a row. If Yes at step 1906 , at step 1908 , the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of unauthorized radio waves has ended, turns off the unauthorized radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912 . It should be noted that even if No in step 1906 , the process proceeds to step 1912 .

Next, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes at step 1912 , at step 1914 , the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that fraudulent magnetism has been detected, turns on the fraudulent magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922 . On the other hand, if No at step 1912, at step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes at step 1916 , at step 1918 , the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that detection of fraudulent magnetism has ended, turns off the fraudulent magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922 . It should be noted that even if No in step 1916 , the process proceeds to step 1922 .

Next, at step 1922, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door open sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door open sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes at step 1922 , at step 1924 , the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D 18 has been opened, turns on the door open flag, and proceeds to step 1932 . On the other hand, if No at step 1922, at step 1926, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door open sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door open sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of consecutive times. If Yes at step 1926 , at step 1928 , the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D 18 has been opened, turns off the door open flag, and proceeds to step 1932 . It should be noted that even if No in step 1926 , the process proceeds to step 1932 .

Next, at step 1932, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame open sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame open sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes at step 1932 , at step 1934 , the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the game machine frame D has been opened, turns on the frame open flag, and proceeds to step 1934 . On the other hand, if No at step 1932, at step 1936, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame open sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame open sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes at step 1936, at step 1938, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the game machine frame D has been opened, turns off the frame open flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 1950 process). . Note that even if No in step 1936, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950).

Next, FIG. 43 is a flow chart of error management processing related to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, at step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error occurrence condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command indicating that an error has occurred and the error type information (command to the sub control board S side) (control command in step 1999). transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the transmission process). Next, at step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error cancellation condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) related to information indicating that the error has been cleared (control command transmission processing in step 1999). is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by ), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-7). Note that even if No in step 1952 or step 1956, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1550-7).

Next, FIG. 44 is a flow chart of firing control signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 1550-7 in FIG. First, in step 1550-7-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates the payout control board (sometimes referred to as the prize ball payout control board KH) and the communication state (BIT0) and disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality (BIT1). Get the error flag. BIT0, which indicates the communication state, indicates normal if "00000000B" and indicates abnormal if "00000001B". In BIT1 indicating disconnection and short-circuit power source abnormality, "00000000B" indicates normality, and "00000010B" indicates abnormality. Next, at step 1550-7-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates the AND of the error flag acquired at step 1550-7-1 and the determination data ("00000011B"). Next, at step 1550-7-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the firing enable signal bit data. For example, BIT5 of the output port indicates the emission enable signal, and "00000000B" indicates an error (abnormality), and "00100000B" indicates normality. Next, at step 1550-7-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs to the output port and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-8). BIT0 is digit 1-bit data, BIT1 is digit 2-bit data, BIT2 is digit 3-bit data, BIT3 is digit 4-bit data, BIT4 is digit 5-bit data, and BIT5 is firing enable signal bit data. , BIT6 is effect strobe bit data, and BIT7 is a security bit.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flow chart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, at step 3502, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the game state temporary storage means and confirms the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 3504, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs a signal indicating the state of the gaming machine to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine. (process of step 1550-11).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal strip G according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of signal output). The external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminals to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning and symbol stop, current game state (normal state, specified game state, special game state, etc.), error information output for outputting various error information detected by an open detection sensor when the door is open terminals, etc.} are provided. As will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are connected to the hall computer HC by cable harnesses so that information can be output from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as a terminal for outputting payout-related information, which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M. For example, a jackpot output terminal for outputting a signal during a jackpot (there are a plurality of terminals depending on the type of jackpot). ), a door opening output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, a start opening winning output terminal that outputs a signal when the start opening wins, and a ball shortage in the prize ball tank KT. Game-related information that is important for the game hall operator, such as output terminal for out-of-ball output that outputs a signal while it is in use, output terminal for the number of times of special design confirmation that outputs a signal when the special design is fixed, etc. This is an output terminal. That is, by using the output terminal for the payout-related information as one output terminal, it is possible to avoid exhaustion of the terminals for output of these important game-related information.

In this embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to transmit the game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. there is That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

Here, an outline of the information transmission system of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. A cable harness connects between G and the hall computer HC. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is composed of a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH and the hall computer HC are always connected. It doesn't mean that That is, an electrical signal (a signal of binary logic whose voltage is Hi level/Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is After being replaced by a physical signal (a signal of binary logic whose switch state is ON/OFF) by the unit, it is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal board G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to respective input/output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the generated magnetic force closes the contact portion G2, thereby connecting the output terminal and the hall computer HC. Further, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, thereby disconnecting the output terminal from the hall computer HC. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, a pulse signal substantially identical to the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G can be obtained by detecting the conduction period. With such a configuration, one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC can be physically secured, and the main control board M and This prevents illegal manipulation of the prize ball payout control board KH (so-called remote control goto). In this example, the mechanism using the relay coil is configured to prevent slanderous behavior and enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC. A photosensor having a light-receiving part is also configured to enable one-way communication (for example, light from a light-emitting part connected to the main control board M and prize ball payout control board KH is received by a light-receiving part connected to the hall computer HC). It should be supplemented that the signal can be received by reading it with the unit.

However, since it is configured to be temporarily replaced with a physical signal (switch state is on/off), the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC, one signal on the external relay terminal board G It is difficult to transmit complicated information using the input/output terminal, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input/output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the number of special symbol determination, It is customary to configure so that only information indicating that "one variation of special symbols has ended" can be transmitted).

Next, the processing on the prize ball payout control board KH will be described in detail with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 46-57.

First, FIG. 46 is a flow chart of a main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. First, at step 4100, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes an error control process at the time of abnormality detection, which will be described later. Next, at step 4200, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes prize ball payout related information transmission/reception processing with the main control board M, which will be described later. Next, at step 4300, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (at the start of prize ball payout/motor drive start), which will be described later. Next, at step 4400, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes prize ball payout control processing (at the end of motor driving/at the end of prize ball payout), which will be described later. Next, at step 4500, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes prize ball payout control processing (during execution of motor drive), which will be described later. Then, at step 4600, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a motor error processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 4100.

Here, referring to the block diagram on the right side of FIG. , an error control means 3200 for controlling errors related to payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a predetermined number of game balls in response to a prize ball payout command and a ball rental command. and a payout control means 3300 for executing payout processing. Each means will be described in detail below.

First, the transmission/reception control means 3100 includes reception control means 3110 for controlling reception of information (for example, commands and signals) from the main control board M and the card unit R, and transmission of information to the main control board M and the card unit R. and transmission control means 3120 for controlling.

Here, the reception control means 3110 further has main side reception control means 3111 for controlling reception of information (for example, commands) from the main control board M. FIG. The main side reception control means 3111 further has a main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a for temporarily storing information transmitted from the main control board M side. In addition, the transmission control means 3120 further has a payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 for temporarily storing error information related to the payout operation for transmission to the main control board M side.

Next, the error control means 3200 includes an error flag temporary storage means 3221 for temporarily storing the on/off state of an error flag such as payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, An error control means 3230 for error control when detecting an abnormality in the operation of the ball, an error control means 3240 for error control when an abnormality is detected when an abnormality is detected, and an error control means 3240 when an error is detected when an abnormality in the path of the ball is detected. Ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 that governs control, payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 that governs error control when a payout motor abnormality is detected, and a fatal abnormality related to the prize ball payout operation is detected. a ball bite error occurrence timer 3200t that manages the error notification period when a ball bite error occurs in the prize ball payout unit KE10; It further has a non-passage error occurrence timer 3200t2 that manages the period of error notification when a non-passage error of the payout count sensor KE10s occurs. Here, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 further has an illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 for accumulating and counting the number of times the payout motor operation abnormality is detected. In addition, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 further has an excess payout accumulation counter 3241 for accumulating and counting the number of payouts of excessive prize balls. In addition, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 further has a payout interval extension control means 3251 for executing time extension processing of payout intervals relating to prize ball payout. Further, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 further has a retry operation control means 3261 for executing a retry operation (retry operation) for eliminating the abnormal operation of the payout motor KE10m.

Next, the payout control means 3300 has a payout process related information temporary storage means 3310 for temporarily storing information necessary for the payout process. Here, the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310 is payout status flag temporary storage means 3311 for temporarily storing the status related to payout (for example, whether or not payout is in progress, whether or not payout abnormality has occurred). At the time of the payout process, a payout counter 3312 for setting the number of game balls to be paid out, a step counter temporary storage means 3313 for temporarily storing the number of steps to be driven by the payout motor KE10m, and the payout motor KE10m are driven. An excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 for temporarily storing the position information of the stator being excited when the excitation is being performed, and a predetermined time (ball passage waiting time) after one continuous payout operation (unit payout operation). It further has a ball passage waiting timer 3315 for timing time (motor pause time) and a unit payout counter 3317 in which the number of game balls to be paid out by the unit payout operation is set. Here, in the present embodiment, the ball passage waiting timer 3315 is a decrement timer, and is configured to stop when the timer value reaches 0, but is not limited to this, and is an increment timer. A configuration using a timer is also possible. Each subroutine will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 47 is a flow chart of error control processing at the time of abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4100 of FIG. First, at step 4110, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of abnormal operation of the payout motor, which will be described later. Next, at step 4120, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of abnormal payout detection, which will be described later. Next, at step 4140, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of ball path abnormality detection, which will be described later. Next, at step 4170, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of abnormal payout motor detection, which will be described later. Next, in step 4190, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (prize ball payout related information transmission/reception process in step 4200).

Next, FIG. 48 is a flow chart of the error control process at the time of detection of malfunction of the payout motor according to the subroutine of step 4110 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of occurrences of the abnormality when a payout motor operation abnormality described later is detected, and to set a flag indicating the occurrence of an error when the number of occurrences of the abnormality exceeds a threshold value. is to turn on. First, in step 4111, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag detects the passing of the game ball by the payout count sensor KE10s under the condition that the prize ball payout process is not executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. It is a flag that is turned on when (withdrawal motor operation abnormality). In the case of Yes in step 4111, in step 4112, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4113, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 adds 1 to the counter value of the fraudulent payout cumulative counter 3231 (increments). Next, in step 4114, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the counter value of the fraudulent payout cumulative counter 3231, and determines whether or not the count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 25). do. In the case of Yes in step 4114 , in step 4115 , the payout motor operation error detection error control means 3230 turns on the payout motor operation error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 , and proceeds to step 4116 . It should be noted that even if No in step 4111 or step 4114 , the process proceeds to step 4116 .

Next, in step 4116, the payout motor operation error detection error control means 3230 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4119, the payout motor operation error detection error control means 3230 sets the payout motor operation error as payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121, and the next process ( It shifts to step 4120 (error control processing when payout abnormality is detected). Also in the case of No in step 4116, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at step 4120 when abnormal payout is detected).

Next, FIG. 49 is a flow chart of error control processing at the time of payout abnormality detection, relating to the subroutine of step 4120 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of excessive game ball payouts caused by the abnormality when a payout abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, and when the count number exceeds the threshold, It is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error. First, in step 4121, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout abnormality detection flag is set when a predetermined number of prize ball payouts based on a command transmitted from the main control board M side is exceeded and an excessive payout of game balls is detected (payout This is a flag that is turned on when there is an abnormality. In the case of Yes in step 4121, in step 4122, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4123, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 acquires the excess payout number temporarily stored in the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310, and sets the excess payout number to the excess payout accumulation counter 3241. to add. Next, in step 4124, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the counter value of the excessive payout accumulation counter 3241, and determines whether or not the count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 25). In the case of Yes at step 4124 , at step 4125 , the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 turns on the overpayment error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 , and proceeds to step 4126 . It should be noted that even if No in step 4121 or step 4124 , the process proceeds to step 4126 . In addition, the overpayment error (state in which the overpayment error flag is on) is configured to be resolved only by turning on the power again, but this example is only an example and is not limited to this. For example, the error may be canceled by pressing an error canceling switch or by elapse of a predetermined period of time.

Next, in step 4126, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the excessive payout error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4126, in step 4129, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 sets an excessive payout error as payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121, and the next process (step 4140 error control processing when ball path abnormality is detected). If No in step 4126, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at step 4140 when ball path abnormality is detected).

Next, FIG. 50 is a flow chart of error control processing at the time of ball path abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4140 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to detect an abnormality in the ball path, which will be described later. Or, when an abnormality corresponding to the ball running out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is detected, along with investigating whether there is a small amount of game balls (ball shortage) abnormality in the prize ball payout unit KE10 , to turn on a flag indicating that an error has occurred. In addition, (2) when an abnormality equivalent to a ball running out abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is detected, by extending the payout interval of the prize ball payout, the waiting time until the ball running out abnormality or ball shortage abnormality is resolved. is to create First, in step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the ball path abnormality detection flag is ON. Here, as will be described later, the ball path abnormality detection flag is set at the end of execution of a predetermined number of payout operations (unit payout operations) scheduled on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and the motor drive operates normally. This flag is turned on when it is detected that the predetermined number of coins to be paid out is not reached under the condition that it is determined that the number of coins to be paid out is not enough. In the case of Yes in step 4141, in step 4142, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the ball path abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4143, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 determines whether or not the conditions for occurrence of the ball running out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality are satisfied. Here, the conditions for occurrence of the ball-out abnormality or the ball-insufficient abnormality are not particularly limited. An example of the condition that the ball running out abnormality occurs when the presence of the game ball cannot be detected, and the ball flow path directly above the sprocket KE10p in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (in this example, two ball flow paths Existence) is provided with a game ball detection sensor, and when the existence of a game ball cannot be detected by any of the detection sensors, it is assumed that the ball shortage abnormality is occurring. In the case of Yes in step 4143 , in step 4144 , ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 turns on the ball path error flag in error flag temporary storage means 3221 . Then, in step 4146, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 sets the ball path error as payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and proceeds to step 4151. It should be noted that even if No in step 4141 or step 4143 , the process proceeds to step 4151 .

Next, in step 4151, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the ball path error flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 4151, in step 4152, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 determines whether or not the conditions for resolving the ball run-out abnormality or ball shortage abnormality are satisfied. Here, there is no particular limitation on the conditions for resolving the out-of-balls abnormality or insufficient balls-abnormality, and in the case where the above-mentioned conditions for occurrence of out-of-balls abnormality or insufficient balls-abnormality are unsatisfied, an example in which the abnormality is resolved can be mentioned. In the case of Yes in step 4152 , in step 4153 , ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 turns off the ball path error flag in error flag temporary storage means 3221 . Then, in step 4155, the payout interval extension control means 3251 determines the excitation timing (for example, 3ms×8 steps=continuous excitation to perform a predetermined number of payout operations at a speed of 1 at 24ms) during normal operation, and the ball A passage waiting time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at step 4170 when an abnormality in the payout motor is detected). On the other hand, if No at step 4152, at step 4156, the payout interval extension control means 3251 adjusts the excitation timing and the ball passage waiting time so that the payout speed of one ball is relatively lower than that during normal operation. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at step 4170 when abnormality of payout motor is detected). Also in the case of No in step 4151, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at step 4170 when abnormality is detected in the payout motor). Here, the excitation timing to be changed is not particularly limited, but for example, after performing a payout operation for one ball at a speed of 3 ms×8 steps=24 ms, wait for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). An example can be given of changing the excitation timing so that a time is provided, and after the waiting time has elapsed, the payout operation is performed again at a rate of 1 payout every 3 ms×8 steps=24 ms. Also, the changed ball passage waiting time is not particularly limited (for example, changed from 500 ms to 30 seconds).

Next, FIG. 51 is a flow chart of the error control process at the time of abnormal payout motor detection according to the subroutine of step 4170 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error when an abnormality in the payout motor, which will be described later, is detected, and to retry the payout motor (the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10). It is to execute a switching control process. First, in step 4171, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor abnormality detection flag is a flag that is turned on when it is determined that the motor drive is not operating normally due to external factors such as ball jam. In the case of Yes at step 4171 , at step 4172 , the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns off the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 . Next, at step 4173 , the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 . Next, at step 4175, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 sets the payout motor error in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 as payout related error information. Then, at step 4176 , the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the retry operation execution standby flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 , and proceeds to step 4177 . It should be noted that even if No in step 4171 , the process proceeds to step 4177 . Here, the retry operation execution waiting flag is a flag for setting the retry operation to a standby state for a predetermined time after the occurrence of a motor error, which will be described later, and providing a wait time for the motor error to be eliminated within the predetermined time.

Next, in step 4177, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 4177, at step 4178, the retry operation control means 3261 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 4178 , at step 4179 , the retry operation control means 3261 turns off the retry operation execution permission flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 . Next, at step 4180 , the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined number of steps during the retry operation as the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 . Here, the predetermined number of steps during the retry operation is not particularly limited, but an example of setting it to the same number as the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms during the retry operation, which will be described later, can be given. Next, at step 4181 , the retry operation control means 3261 sets 0 as the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 . Next, in step 4182, the retry operation control means 3261 selects a retry operation excitation method (for example, a well-known 1-2 phase excitation method) related to stepping motor operation and a one-step switching speed for retry operation (for example, 6 ms). Next, in step 4183, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) in the ball passage waiting timer 3315 as the ball passage waiting time/motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation. Next, at step 4184 , the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the retry operation in-execution flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 . Then, in step 4185, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the motor driving flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and shifts to the next process (error control process at step 4190 when payout stop abnormality is detected). do. Also in the case of No in step 4177 or step 4178, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at step 4190 when an abnormality requiring stoppage of payout is detected).

Next, FIG. 52 is a flow chart of the error control process at the time of the payout stop abnormality detection, according to the subroutine of step 4190 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process is detected, and to detect a fatal error related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process. To disable the continuation of prize ball payout processing until the abnormality is eliminated. Here, the fatal anomaly related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process includes a communication error between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH, a communication error between the card unit R and the prize ball payout control board KH, and payout. The sensor abnormality of the count sensor KE10s, the tray (upper tray) full tank abnormality, and the like can be mentioned. First, in step 4191-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4191-1, in step 4191-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 sets and starts the error duration (for example, 120 seconds) in the ball biting error generation timer 3200t, Go to step 4192-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4191-1, in step 4191-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the ball engagement error generation timer 3200t, and determines whether the timer value is 0. judge. If Yes at step 4191-3, at step 4191-4, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4192-1. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4191-3, the process proceeds to step 4192-1.

Next, in step 4192-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the switch non-passage error detection flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4192-1, in step 4192-2, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 sets the error duration (for example, 120 seconds) to the non-passage error generation timer 3200t2 and starts it, Go to step 4193-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4192-1, in step 4192-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the non-passage error generation timer 3200t2, and determines whether the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4192-3, in step 4192-4, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the switch non-passing error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4193-1. transition to On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4192-3, the process proceeds to step 4193-1.

Next, in step 4193-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not the error release switch KH3a has been pressed. If Yes in step 4193-1, in steps 4193-2 to 4193-5, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 generates a flag ( For example, the payout motor operation error flag, payout operation incomplete game ball detection flag, payout motor error flag, switch non-passing error detection flag) are turned off, and the process proceeds to step 4194-1. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4193-1, the process proceeds to step 4194-1.

Next, in step 4194-1, the payout stop required error detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a communication error between the main control board M and the ball payout control board KH is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4194-1, in step 4194-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns on the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. . On the other hand, if No in step 4194-1, in step 4194-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. Transition.

Next, in step 4195-1, the error control means 3270 when detecting a payout stop abnormality detection detects a sensor abnormality of the payout count sensor KE10s (for example, there is no input from the count sensor, or the input value is constant for a predetermined time or longer). , etc.) is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4195-1, in step 4195-2, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 turns on the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4196-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4195-1, in step 4195-3, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 turns off the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4196- Go to 1.

Next, in step 4196-1, the error control means 3270 upon detection of abnormality requiring stoppage of dispensing determines whether or not the tray (upper tray) full tank abnormality has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4196-1, the payout stop required abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns on the saucer full error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 in step 4196-2. Next, in step 4196-3, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 transmits a saucer full tank command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4196-1, the payout stop required error detection error control means 3270 turns off the tray full error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 in step 4196-4. Next, in step 4196-5, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 transmits a tray full tank release command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1.

Next, in step 4197-1, the payout stop required error detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a connection error of the card unit R is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4197-1, in step 4197-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns on the CR unit disconnection error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4198-1. to On the other hand, if No in step 4197-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the CR unit disconnection error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 in step 4197-3, and -1.

Next, in step 4198-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and part of the error related to the payout operation stop (for example, excessive payout error, prize ball device Error, payout motor operation error, game ball detection when payout operation is not completed, payout motor error, switch non-passage error) is determined whether or not all flags are off.

In the case of Yes in step 4198-1, in step 4198-2, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, the communication error flag, the prize ball device error flag, the tray full It is determined whether or not all the error flags of the error flag and the CR unit unconnected error flag are off. In the case of Yes in step 4198-2, in step 4198-3, the payout stop required abnormality detection error control means 3270 executes the normal payout operation in the payout control means 3300 (that is, payout operation in step 4198-4 described later). is paused, the payout operation is resumed), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). On the other hand, if No in step 4198-1 or step 4198-2, in step 4198-4, the payout stop required error detection error control means 3270 forcibly suspends the payout operation in the payout control means 3300, and then (process of step 4200).

Next, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of prize ball payout related information reception processing (for the main control board) according to the subroutine of step 4200 of FIG. Here, the first half of the flow is information reception processing from the main control board M (and accompanying processing of setting the number of prize balls to be paid out), and the second half of the flow is information transmission processing to the main control board M. Therefore, the first half of the process of receiving information from the main control board M (and the associated process of setting the number of prize balls to be paid out) will be described. With reference to 3311, it is determined whether or not the prize ball payout flag is off. Here, the "prize ball payout flag" is when the prize ball payout process is being executed on the payout control side (when the payout motor of the payout device is in driving operation, when the ball passage waiting time/motor pause time It is a flag that is turned on when the If Yes at step 4205, at step 4210, the main reception control means 3111 refers to the main reception information temporary storage means 3111a and determines whether or not a prize ball payout command has been received. If Yes at step 4210, at step 4215, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns on the prize ball payout start permission flag. Next, in step 4220, the payout control means 3300 derives the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the prize ball payout command information temporarily stored in the main-side reception information temporary storage means 3111a, and determines the prize ball payout. The number information is set in the payout counter 3312, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225). This completes the set processing of the number of prize balls to be paid out when the normal prize ball payout processing is executed. It should be noted that even if No in steps 4205 and 4210, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225).

Next, the information transmission processing to the main control board M will be described. First, in step 4225, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout-related error transmission flag is on. judge. Here, the "payout-related error transmission flag" is when the payout-related error {payout motor operation error, excessive payout error, ball out error, ball shortage error, payout motor error, payout stop error} occurs. The flag is turned on immediately after the error is notified to the main control board M side and then turned off. If Yes at step 4225 , at step 4230 the error control means 3200 turns off the payout-related error transmission flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 . Then, at step 4235, the transmission control means 3120 transmits the payout-related error information set in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 to the main control board M side, and proceeds to the next process (step 4240). It should be noted that even if No in step 4225, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4240).

Next, at step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion flag is on. Here, the "prize ball payout completion flag" is a flag that is turned on when the payout control means 3300 determines that the prize ball payout is completed. If Yes at step 4240, at step 4245, the transmission control means 3120 accesses the flag area of the payout status flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout completion flag. Then, in step 4250, the transmission control means 3120 transmits information indicating that the prize ball payout has been completed to the main control board M side, and the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4300 (prize ball payout start・Motor drive start)}. Incidentally, even in the case of No at step 4240, the next process {prize ball payout control process at step 4300 (at the start of prize ball payout/motor drive start)} is shifted to. With this, the prize ball payout completion information transmission process is terminated.

Next, FIG. 54 is a flow chart of prize ball payout control processing (at the start of prize ball payout/motor drive start) relating to the subroutine of step 4300 in FIG. Here, this process is the process before executing the motor drive process of the next step 4400, and in response to receiving the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side, the number of motor drive steps, etc. This is the process of setting. First, at step 4305, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout start permission flag (see step 4215 in FIG. 53) is on. In the case of Yes in step 4305, in steps 4310 and 4315, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout flag, and turns off the prize ball payout start permission flag. do.

Next, at step 4320, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the number of paid out prize balls set in the payout counter 3312 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 3). If Yes at step 4320 , at step 4325 , the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the predetermined number of coins are paid out, and proceeds to step 4332 . The counter value (n) temporarily stored here is the number of steps of the stepping motor. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the number of prize ball payouts set in the payout counter 3312 is paid out. 4332.

Next, at step 4332 , the payout control means 3300 sets the planned payout number in the current unit payout operation (that is, the payout number scheduled at step 4325 or step 4330 ) to the unit payout counter 3317 . Next, at step 4335, the payout control means 3300 sets 0 as the excitation stator position identification counter value (j). Here, the excitation stator position specific counter indicates the relative position of the rotor with respect to the stator, and "0" corresponds to the default position during payout standby (stop). Next, in step 4337, the payout control means 3300 switches between the normal operation excitation method (for example, the well-known 2-2 phase excitation method) and the normal operation switching speed (for example, 3 ms ). Next, at step 4338, the payout control means 3300 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) in the ball passage waiting timer 3315 as the ball passage waiting time/motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation. Next, at step 4339, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the retry operation executing flag. Here, the retry operation execution flag is a flag that is turned on while the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation is being executed as described above. Then, at step 4340, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the motor driving flag, and performs the next processing {prize ball payout control process at step 4400 (at the end of motor drive, prize At the end of the ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No at step 4305, at step 4345, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is ON. If Yes in step 4345, the motor has already been driven, so the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4400 (at the end of motor driving/at the end of prize ball payout)} is shifted to.

On the other hand, if No at step 4345, at step 4350, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout continuation flag is off. Here, the prize ball payout continuation flag refers to the case where the prize ball payout operation should be continued after the stepping motor has been operated for a predetermined number of steps in the unit payout operation, and when the ball passage waiting time/motor pause time has elapsed ( A detailed condition will be described later). In the case of Yes at step 4350, the next process {prize ball payout control process at step 4400 (at the end of motor driving/at the end of prize ball payout)} is shifted to.

On the other hand, if No at step 4350, at step 4352, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout continuation flag. Then, in step 4354, the payout control means 3300 refers to the unit payout counter 3317 to determine whether or not the counter value exceeds 0 (that is, whether or not all of the planned payout quantity in the current unit payout operation has been paid out). or not). If Yes at step 4354 , at step 4356 , the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 , turns on the ball path abnormality detection flag, and proceeds to step 4320 . On the other hand, if step 4354 is No, the process proceeds to step 4320 without executing step 4356 . That is, when the prize ball payout continuation flag is ON, the process of setting the motor driving step number and the like is executed again without being triggered by the reception of the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. If it is determined that the number of balls scheduled to be paid out by the current unit payout operation has not been completely paid out, an abnormality that causes a ball-out error or ball shortage error is detected.

Next, FIG. 55 is a flow chart of prize ball payout control processing (at the end of motor drive/at the end of prize ball payout) relating to the subroutine of step 4400 in FIG. Here, this process is the termination process when all the motors scheduled in the previous process (step 4300) are finished to be driven, or when all the scheduled prize balls are paid out. . Here, step 4402 to step 4419 executes motor drive end processing, step 4420 to step 4425 execute game ball detection processing, and step 4430 to step 4462 execute prize ball payout end processing.

First, the motor drive end processing will be described. First, in step 4402, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the prize ball payout flag is on. do. In the case of Yes at step 4402, at step 4405, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 4405, at step 4410, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 to determine whether the counter value is 0, that is, the step of FIG. It is determined whether or not all the number of steps in the current unit payout operation set in 4325 or step 4330 have been executed. If Yes at step 4410, at step 4415, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor driving flag. Next, at step 4416, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation in-execution flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 4416 , at step 4417 , the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 , turns off the retry operation executing flag, and proceeds to step 4418 . On the other hand, if No in step 4416 , the process proceeds to step 4418 . Next, at step 4418, the payout control means 3300 maintains the resting state of the stepping motor (in this example, the excitation output is lowered and the current excitation stator position identification counter value (j) is continuously excited). Next, at step 4419, the payout control means 3300 starts the ball passage waiting timer 3315, and proceeds to step 4420. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 4420 also in the case of No in step 4405 or step 4410 . With this, the motor driving end processing is ended.

Next, the game ball detection process will be described. First, at step 4420, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. In the case of Yes at step 4420 , at step 4422 , the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the unit payout counter 3317 . Next, at step 4425 , the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the payout counter 3312 , and proceeds to step 4430 . It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 4430 also in the case of No in step 4420 . Here, in this example, the value of the payout counter 3312 is configured to be decremented by 1 each time an entering ball is detected, but is not limited to this, and multiple entering balls are detected. If so, it may be configured so that the value corresponding to the number of hits can be subtracted. With this, the game ball detection processing is terminated.

Next, the prize ball payout end processing will be described. First, at step 4430, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is 0 or less. In the case of Yes at step 4430, at step 4431, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4431 (that is, when the number of game balls related to the payout is detected by the sensor even though the driving of the motor related to the payout has not ended), in step 4432, The payout control means 3300 turns on the game ball detection flag when payout is not completed in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 , and proceeds to step 4435 . On the other hand, if step 4431 is No, the process proceeds to step 4435 as well.

Next, in steps 4435 and 4440, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the prize ball payout flag, and turns on the prize ball payout completion flag. Next, at step 4441, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is less than zero. In the case of Yes at step 4441 , at step 4442 , the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 . Next, at step 4443, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312, and based on the count value, the number of excess payouts (for example, if the counter value is "-3", the number of excess payouts is "3"). is temporarily stored in the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310, and the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process at step 4500 (during motor drive execution)}. In addition, in the case of No in step 4441 (that is, when the count value of the payout counter 3312 is 0 and the predetermined number of payouts are normally paid out), the following processing {prize ball payout control processing of step 4500 (during execution of motor drive)}. In this example, when the value of the payout counter 3312 becomes 0 or less, overpayment is detected. When a predetermined time (for example, sufficient detection standby time until the game ball paid out by the drive is detected by the payout count sensor KE10s) has passed, detection of excessive payout (payout counter 3312 value less than 0 determination of whether or not) can be executed (that is, excessive payout is an unexpected situation in which the number of game balls that exceeds the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out has been paid out). The occurrence of this unforeseen event, which is extremely difficult to occur by design, means that there is a malfunction in one of the dispensing mechanisms, or that fraudulent acts have occurred during the dispensing operation. (meaning that it is likely that

On the other hand, if No at step 4430, at step 4445, the payout control means 3300 refers to the timer value of the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 4445, in step 4446, the payout control means 3300 turns on the switch non-passing error detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 (in this example, after the payout operation ends, a predetermined When the game balls for the number of game balls related to the payout operation are not detected even after the ball passing waiting time of time has passed, it is immediately determined that the switch non-passing error has occurred. It is not limited, and it may be configured to determine that a switch non-passage error has occurred when the event occurs multiple times.)

Next, at step 4447, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry action execution standby flag is off. Here, the retry operation execution waiting flag is a flag that is turned on when a motor error occurs during motor driving as described above. In the case of Yes at step 4447, at step 4450, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout continuation flag, and performs the following processing {prize ball payout control process at step 4500 ( (during execution of motor drive)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4447, in steps 4460 and 4462, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry action execution standby flag, and sets the retry action execution permission flag. It is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process at step 4500 (during execution of motor drive)}. Incidentally, also in the case of No at step 4445, the next process {prize ball payout control process at step 4500 (during execution of motor drive)} is shifted to.

Here, if No in step 4402 (that is, if the prize ball payout process is not being executed), in step 4470, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. judge. In the case of Yes at step 4470, at step 4472, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and performs the following processing {prize ball payout control process at step 4500 ( (during execution of motor drive)}. Incidentally, even in the case of No at step 4470, the next process {prize ball payout control process at step 4500 (during execution of motor drive)} is shifted to.

Next, FIG. 56 is a flow chart of prize ball payout control processing (during execution of motor drive) according to the subroutine of step 4500 of FIG. Here, this process is a process of actually driving the motor based on the number of steps set in the previous process (step 4400). First, at step 4505, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is ON. The motor driving flag is a flag that is turned on when a predetermined step counter number is set in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 54). This is a flag that turns off when all the excitation is executed. Here, if Yes in step 4505 , the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the step counter value (n) of the step counter temporary storage means 3313 in step 4510 . Next, at step 4520 , the payout control means 3300 updates (increments by one) the exciting stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 . Next, at step 4525, the payout control means 3300 excites the stator corresponding to the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 based on the predetermined excitation method and switching speed. .

Next, at step 4530, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 is the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Here, the confirmation of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10 ms is performed for the purpose of confirming whether or not an abnormal operation related to the motor operation (out-of-step phenomenon due to ball jamming, etc.) has occurred. In the case of Yes at step 4530, at step 4550, the payout control means 3300 refers to the presence or absence of the detection signal from the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Then, at step 4555, error control means 3200 determines whether or not the rotor is rotating correctly, that is, whether or not a motor error has occurred, based on the presence or absence of the detection signal at step 4550. If Yes at step 4555, at step 4560, the error control means 3200 turns on the motor position abnormality flag in the payout status flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to the next process (motor error processing at step 4600). If No at step 4530, the process proceeds to the next process (motor error processing at step 4600). The motor error flag in means 3221 is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4600 for motor error processing).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flow chart of the motor error processing according to the subroutine of step 4600 of FIG. First, the purpose of this processing is to forcibly shift the motor drive to a rest state when a motor error is detected. First, at step 4605, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor position abnormality flag is on. Here, as shown in step 4560 in FIG. 56, it is detected at a predetermined detection timing whether or not the motor is at a predetermined rotational position. and the motor position abnormality flag is turned on. In the case of Yes at step 4605, at step 4610, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor position abnormality flag. Next, at step 4615 , the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 . Then, at step 4620, the error control means 3200 clears the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313, and proceeds to the next process (error detection process at step 4100). This is because the number of steps set this time was not executed due to the occurrence of a motor error. 4415). Note that even if No in step 4605, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of abnormality detection in step 4100).

Next, referring to FIGS. 58 to 78, the control processing executed by the sub-main control section SM will be described. First, FIG. 58 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (especially sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 4(d) is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after resetting such as when power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the gaming machine is powered on, in step 5002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes initial processing based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information → Initialize the RAM on the sub side, and when various information commands are received → Reset the information related to the effect at the time of power failure in the RAM on the sub side). Next, in step 5004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S deletes the information indicating that the trigger is pending (holding that has won the prefetching lottery) from the temporarily stored information related to the pending. If there is no hold in the hold with the information, this process is not executed and the next process is performed), the hold display mode and the change suggestion display are all displayed in "white" (pre-reading effect reset the processing related to). Note that the processing at the time of power failure is not limited to this, and even after the power failure is restored, the information indicating that the trigger is pending, the information related to the pending display mode, and the state related to the display mode of the change suggestive display can be deleted. Instead, it may be configured so that various effects such as a look-ahead effect can be continued. In the case of such a configuration, for example, an evacuation area is provided on the sub side so that information can be maintained even during a power outage, and in the event of a power outage, the information related to the presentation is backed up in the evacuation area, and the power outage is restored. It may be configured to restore backed-up information from time to time. In addition, at the time of recovery from power failure, at the start of fluctuation, at the time of stoppage of fluctuation, and at the time of hold occurrence (regarding the hold other than the newly generated hold), the main control board M side provides information on the hold and the contents of the change suggestion display. It may be configured to receive again {Although not shown in this example, only information related to the number of reservations is transmitted from the main control board M side at the time of power failure recovery (depending on the content of the reservation) such information is not transmitted). Therefore, the information related to the hold that existed at the time of the power failure does not exist after the power is restored, so the pre-reading effect cannot be executed for the hold. (It may be configured to receive information related to and execute a prefetch effect for the hold). It should be noted that in the event that a power failure occurs during the variation of the decorative pattern, if there is no function to maintain the information at the time of the power failure, it will take time until the end command of the variation is received from the main control board M side. During this time, a dark screen (for example, a screen displaying "preparing", etc.) is displayed}. After that, the process shifts to loop processing for repeatedly executing (f), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (f) is executed, first, in step 5200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes customization control processing, which will be described later, as shown in the processing of (f) in FIG. Next, at step 5500, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a hold information management process, which will be described later. Next, at step 5700, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 5800, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes decorative symbol display control processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 5900, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a special game-related display control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 5999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the commands set by these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and ends this repeat processing routine. do.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form of performing loop processing of the sub-main side routine (S5200 to S5999) after resetting. Further, the processing of FIG. 4(e) is the interrupt processing of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), at step 5005, the sub-main control unit SM receives the command input port ( Check the input port of the data signal line described above). Then, in step 5006, the sub-main control unit SM stores the command sent from the main control board M side in the RAM (for example, main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) of the sub-main control unit SM based on the confirmation result. is temporarily stored, and the process executed immediately before this interrupt process is resumed.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flow chart of customization control processing according to the subroutine of step 5200 in FIG. First, in step 5202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the non-game period measurement timer value is equal to or greater than the first guide value (the timer value for displaying the first customization guide screen, 5 seconds in this example). Determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 5202, in step 5204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first customization guidance screen on the forefront of the display area SG10. In this example, the player can change the sound volume level, the light intensity level, and the notice frequency (these may be collectively referred to as gaming machine customization). is called a customization guide screen. Note that the customization guide screen has two stages of display mode depending on the non-game period, and the first customization guide screen→the second customization guide screen is displayed from the one that can be displayed in a short period of time during the non-game period. It should be noted that the mode of notifying the transition condition of the screen for executing gaming machine customization is not limited to this, and (1) display the first customization guidance screen at the timing when the non-game period measurement timer value reaches 5 seconds. The timing at which the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are turned on (the lamps provided for the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are turned on), and the non-game period measurement timer value reaches 75 seconds. (2) When the non-game period starts (the non-game period measurement timer value = 0 and the measurement of the non-game period measurement timer starts), press the sub-input button The configuration may be such that SB and the cross key SB-2 are lit. Next, at step 5250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes customization guide screen display control processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 5300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a display control process during customization execution, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process. If No at step 5202, at step 5350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the in-game customization control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process.

Next, FIG. 60 is a flow chart of the customization guide screen display control process related to the subroutine of step 5250 in FIG. First, at step 5252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. The cross key SB-2 has four operable buttons: an up button, a down button, a right button, and a left button. If Yes at step 5252, at step 5255, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is displaying the customization guide screen (the first customization guide screen and the second customization guide screen are collectively referred to as the customization guide screen). It is determined whether or not. If Yes at step 5255, at step 5256, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the displayed customization screen, displays the light amount adjustment screen on the forefront of the display area SG10, and proceeds to step 5268. On the other hand, if step 5255 is No, the process proceeds to step 5268 as well. When the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated while the standby demo screen is displayed, the light intensity adjustment screen (screen for executing light intensity adjustment) is not displayed, but it is possible to adjust the light intensity. (This is the same processing as the in-game customization control processing, which will be described later).

If No at step 5252, at step 5258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 5258, in step 5260, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the displayed customization screen and standby demo screen, and displays the customization executing screen (screen for switching the notice frequency) in the display area. It is displayed in the foreground, and the process proceeds to step 5268 . Note that the configuration of the standby demonstration screen applicable to this example is as follows: (1) the volume is relatively low or silent during the display of the standby demonstration screen (details will be described later); The demonstration display period (maximum display period among the periods in which the standby demo screen can be displayed) is longer than the demonstration start value (240 seconds) (for example, 660 seconds). Even if no game ball enters the main game start opening during display, the display of the standby demo screen ends upon detection of the shooting handle D44. Even if the value (240 seconds) is reached, the standby demo screen will not be displayed, and only the volume will be the same as when the standby demo screen is displayed. and detection of the firing handle D44 when the standby demo screen is displayed (or during a specific non-game period), or when the maximum volume that can be output is relatively small (it may be in a mute state). (6) When the sub-input button SB is operated while the standby demo screen is displayed, the customization execution screen is displayed on the front layer. , the pattern change stop display screen (a state in which the stop pattern of the normal decorative pattern is displayed) is displayed on the rear layer, and the pattern change stop display screen is displayed depending on the detection of the firing handle D44, and the cross key SB-2 is pressed. It may be configured such that when operated, the standby demo screen continues to be displayed, but the sound volume and the amount of light are changed. As a specific display example of the standby demo screen, it may be configured to display a moving image for executing a game explanation or a motif introduction of the gaming machine (character introduction or advance notice introduction). The display condition of the standby demonstration screen is not limited to the fact that the non-game period has reached the demonstration start value (240 seconds in this example). (or the time when the game ball is not fired) reaches a predetermined time A (10 seconds), the standby demo screen is displayed, and the maximum display time of the standby demo screen is a predetermined time B (100 seconds). may In such a configuration, the predetermined time A (10 seconds) is longer than the shortest variation time (eg, 1.5 seconds) in the gaming machine and longer than the maximum variation time (eg, 240 seconds). It's short. Also, the predetermined time B (10 seconds) is longer than the shortest variation time (for example, 1.5 seconds) in the gaming machine and shorter than the maximum variation time (for example, 240 seconds). Also, the time during which the operation of the shooting handle D44 is not detected (or the time during which the game ball is not shot) is longer than the average time from when the game ball is shot onto the game board until it flows into the outlet D36. It is preferable that the predetermined time A (10 seconds) is longer (in order to prevent the standby demo screen from being displayed while the player is shooting the game ball).

If No in step 5258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 5262 whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes at step 5262, at step 5264, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the volume adjustment prohibition flag is off. If Yes at step 5264, at step 5265, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the customization guide screen is being displayed. If Yes at step 5265, at step 5266, the displayed customization screen is erased, the volume control screen is displayed at the forefront of the display area SG10, and the process proceeds to step 5268. When the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated while the standby demo screen is displayed, the volume control screen (screen for executing volume control) is not displayed, but the volume can be adjusted. (This is the same processing as the in-game customization control processing, which will be described later). In addition, while the symbol variation is being displayed, the standby demo screen is being displayed, and the symbol variation stop display screen is being displayed, the volume control screen may be hidden. It may be configured so that it is possible to adjust the volume level and change the display of the volume control screen according to the volume level with the cross key SB-2. It may be configured such that the volume level can be adjusted by the cross key SB-2 and the display of the volume adjustment screen can be changed according to the volume level.

Here, to summarize the processing of steps 5262 to 5266,
(1) When the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated while the first customization guidance screen is being displayed and the volume control prohibition flag is ON → the volume control screen is not displayed and the volume level is changed. Unchangeable (2) When the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated while the first customization guidance screen is being displayed and the volume control prohibition flag is off → the volume control screen is displayed, and the display is followed. The volume level can be changed. (3) If the left and right buttons of the four-way controller SB-2 are operated while the standby demo screen is displayed and the volume control prohibition flag is off → the volume control screen is not displayed (standby The demo screen remains displayed) and the volume level can be changed.

Next, at step 5268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the non-game period measurement timer value has become equal to or greater than the demonstration start value (240 seconds). In the case of Yes at step 5268, at step 5270, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the standby demonstration screen on the forefront of the display area SG10. Next, at step 5272, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the sub-side game state type to demo screen mode, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5300). In this embodiment, the standby demo screen is displayed when the non-game period measurement timer value reaches the demonstration start value, but the display start condition of the standby demo screen is not limited to this. For example, when the non-game period measurement timer value reaches the demo start value in the non-time-reduced game state, the standby demo screen is displayed, while the non-game period measurement timer value starts the demonstration in the time-reduced game state. It may be configured so that the standby demonstration screen is not displayed when the value is reached (in the time-reduced game state, the standby demonstration screen is not displayed regardless of the non-game period measurement timer value). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, regardless of the game state, the volume output when the non-game period measurement timer value reaches the demonstration start value is the volume of the demo screen mode "1" or no sound. That is, it may be configured to be lower than the current volume setting value (the volume determined by the volume switch and the volume level) or to be silent. It may be configured so that it is lower than the set value of the light amount (the light amount determined from the light amount level) or is silent. Also, in the time shortening game state, the non-game period measurement timer may not measure itself (the timer value is always 0, and the timer may not measure time).

In addition, if No in step 5268, in step 5274, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the non-game period measurement timer value is the second guide value (the timer value for displaying the second customization guide screen, in this example , 75 seconds). In the case of Yes at step 5274, at step 5276, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the second customization guide screen in the forefront of the display area SG10, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5300). Note that even if No in step 5264 or step 5274, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5300). While the standby demo screen is being displayed, the customization guidance screen is configured not to be displayed, but the sub-input button SB and cross key SB-2 are lit (at the edges of the sub-input button SB and cross key SB-2). (a lamp that can be turned on is provided) (lights up even while the customization screen is being displayed).

Next, FIG. 61 is an example of a customization guidance screen image diagram according to this embodiment. First, the upper left part is the first customization guide screen, the upper right part is the second customization guide screen, and the lower left part is the standby demo screen. A first customization guidance screen is displayed. On the first customization screen, it is displayed that the actual machine can be customized (changed the notice frequency) by pressing the sub-input button SB, but the method of adjusting the volume and light amount is not displayed. The display of the first customization screen is translucent, and even if the display of the first customization guide screen and the decoration pattern are displayed overlapping, the decoration pattern can be visually recognized. Further, by pressing the sub-input button SB while the first customization guidance screen is displayed, it is possible to customize the actual machine (change the notice frequency).

Next, after the first customization guide screen is displayed, when 70 seconds have passed in the non-game state (75 seconds have passed since the non-game period started), the second customization guide screen is displayed. Is displayed. In addition to the display mode of the first customization guide screen, the second customization guide screen has a display mode in which a guide image for volume adjustment and a guide image for light amount adjustment are added to the lower portion of the display area SG10. Note that the first customization guide screen and the second customization guide screen are translucent like the first customization guide screen.

Next, after the second customization guide screen is displayed, when 165 seconds have passed in the non-game state (when 240 seconds have passed since the non-game period started), the standby demo screen is displayed. Is displayed. In the standby demo screen, the display of the first customization guidance screen and the second customization guidance screen is erased, and the story display and the like are displayed. Note that the standby demonstration screen is not translucent, and if the display of the standby demonstration screen overlaps the decorative patterns, the decorative patterns may be invisible or difficult to see. display area is smaller than that of the standby demonstration screen, decoration pattern display is displayed in a rear layer than that of the standby demonstration screen, etc.). Note that when the on-adjustment prohibition flag is on, the second customization guide screen is configured not to display the on-adjustment.

Next, FIG. 62 is a flow chart of the display control processing during customization execution according to the subroutine of step 5300 in FIG. First, at step 5302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the light amount adjustment screen is being displayed. If Yes at step 5302, at step 5304, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. If Yes at step 5304, at step 5306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the selected light amount level based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and executes lighting with the lighting pattern for confirmation. , go to step 5320 . In this embodiment, when adjusting the light amount level,
(1) When a light intensity level is selected with the cross key SB-2, it lights up in a confirmation lighting pattern corresponding to the light intensity level being selected. (2) When the light intensity level is determined with the sub-input button SB, A notification display for confirmation is displayed in the display area SG10 to notify which light amount level has been determined (audio is output).
It is configured as described above.

If No at step 5302, at step 5308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the volume control screen is being displayed. If Yes at step 5308, at step 5310, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. If Yes at step 5310, at step 5312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the volume level being selected based on the operation of the cross key SB-2 and outputs a sound for confirmation, and proceeds to step 5320. Transition. In this embodiment, when adjusting the volume level,
(1) When a volume level is selected with the cross key SB-2, a confirmation sound corresponding to the selected volume level is output. (2) When the volume level is determined with the sub-input button SB, the volume level is displayed in the display area SG10 (audio is output)
It is configured as described above. In addition, without outputting the confirmation sound, the above-described volume control screen may be always displayed (or always displayed during symbol stop display, during symbol variation display, etc.).

If No at step 5308, at step 5314, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the customization execution screen is being displayed. If Yes at step 5314, at step 5316, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 5316, in step 5318, the CPUSC of the sub control board S switches the advance notice to be changed based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to step 5318-1. On the other hand, if No in step 5316, the process also proceeds to step 5318-1. Next, at step 5318-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. If Yes at step 5318-1, at step 5318-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 5318-2, in step 5318-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S switches the target notice frequency. Next, at step 5318-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. If Yes at step 5318-4, at step 5318-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the selected notice frequency, erases the customization screen, and proceeds to step 5318-6. On the other hand, if No in steps 5318-1, 5318-2, and 5318-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 5318-7 whether or not a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed. If Yes at step 5318-7, at step 5318-8, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the customization screen and proceeds to step 5318-6. On the other hand, if No in steps 5314 and 5318-7, the process proceeds to the next step.

Next, at step 5320, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated, in other words, whether or not the volume level and light amount level have been determined. If Yes in step 5320 , go to step 5324 . On the other hand, if No at step 5320, at step 5322, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the customization screen display started. In the case of Yes in step 5322, in step 5324, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S makes a decision based on the currently selected sound volume level and light amount level, and then clears the customization screen. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the sub-input button SB is operated, or when a predetermined time (5 seconds) elapses without operating the sub-input button SB in setting the volume level and the light amount level, the gaming machine Although it is configured to determine customization settings, it is not limited to this, and (1) operation of the firing handle D44 has been detected, (2) pattern variation has started, (3) a predetermined entrance (for example , the game machine customization setting may be determined when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10). In addition, even if the pattern variation of the decorative symbols is started while the customization screen is being displayed, the customization screen remains displayed (the customization screen is displayed in the front layer rather than the variable display of the decorative symbols), and the gaming machine customization is executed. may be configured as possible.

Next, at step 5325, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets and starts the non-game period measurement timer (increment timer), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5500).

Thus, in the present embodiment, the display mode related to gaming machine customization from the start of the non-game period (the timing at which the measurement of the non-game period measurement timer starts) is "non-game period measurement timer value = 0 seconds → Start of non-game period" → "Timer value for measuring non-game period = 5 seconds → Start of display of the first customization guidance screen, customization screen (customization execution screen, light amount adjustment screen, and volume adjustment screen are collectively referred to as customization screens. start of transitionable period” → “non-game period measurement timer value = 75 seconds → start display of second customization guidance screen” → “non-game period measurement timer value = 240 seconds → start display of standby demo screen, customization screen transition possible period end" → "non-game period measurement timer value = 900 seconds → execute default setting, display start of power saving screen", but not limited to this, for example, "non-game period Measurement timer value = 0 seconds → Start of non-game period" → "Timer value for measurement of non-game period = 5 seconds → Start of transitionable period for customization screen (no change in screen display)" → "Timer value for measurement of non-game period = 75 Seconds → Start of display of the second customization guide screen, start lighting of the lamps provided for the sub-input button SB and cross key SB-2 → “Timer value for measuring non-game period = 240 seconds → Start of display of standby demo screen, customization Screen changeable period ends"→"non-game period measurement timer value = 900 seconds→execute default setting, display start of power saving screen". The start of the shiftable period of the customization screen means that the period during which the customization screen is displayed by operating the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB-2 has started.

Next, FIG. 63 is an example of an image diagram of a customization guidance screen according to this embodiment. First, in the left part of the figure, when the first customization guidance screen or the second customization guidance screen is displayed on the effect display device SG, the player operates the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2. 4 shows a display mode of a setting screen for volume control displayed when Specifically, when the first customization guidance screen or the second customization guidance screen is displayed, if the player operates the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2, the volume control screen is displayed. If the left button of the cross key SB-2 is pressed during the display of , the sound for confirmation from the speaker D24 will decrease, and the lit portion (white portion) of the volume display in the schematic diagram of the upper speaker will decrease. (indicates that the volume level is decreased), and when the right button of SB-2 of the cross key is pressed, the sound for confirmation from the speaker D24 is increased, and the volume is displayed in the schematic diagram of the upper speaker. (indicating that the volume level increases), and by pressing the sub-input button SB, the currently selected volume level is determined.

Next, the middle part of the figure is displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated when the first customization guidance screen or the second customization guidance screen is displayed on the effect display device SG. 10 shows a display mode of a setting screen for light amount adjustment that is displayed. Specifically, when the player operates the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed, and while the light amount adjustment screen is being displayed, the first customization guide screen or the second customization guide screen is displayed. When the upper button of the cross key SB-2 is pressed, the petal-shaped lit portions displayed on the effect display device SG are displayed in three stages of "0 → 6 → 12". When the down button of the SB-2 of the cross key is pressed, the petal-shaped lighting portion displayed on the effect display device SG is increased to 12. It is configured to decrease in three stages of 1 → 6 → 0 (indicating that the light intensity level decreases), and by pressing the sub-input button SB, the light intensity level being selected is determined. there is Even if the cross key SB-2 is operated while the standby demo screen is displayed, the volume control screen and the light amount control screen are not displayed, but the volume level and the light amount level themselves can be changed. In the figure, the display corresponding to the light amount level is a petal-shaped display, and the lighting portions are configured to increase in three stages of "0 → 6 → 12", but this is limited. Instead, the number of lit portions may be increased in three stages of "1 → 2 → 3", or three petal-like displays (with different sizes of display areas, Three petals of large, medium, and small) may be configured to increase in three stages of "small→medium→large".

Next, the right part of the figure is displayed when the sub-input button SB is operated while the first customization guidance screen, the second customization guidance screen, or the standby demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device SG. 11 shows a display mode of a customizing execution screen to be displayed. Specifically, when the player operates the sub-input button SB, a customization screen (advance customization screen) is displayed, and when the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are pressed on the customization screen, the cursor moves and the sub-input button is pressed. By pressing SB, the notice on which the cursor is positioned is selected (transition to a screen for changing the frequency of occurrence of the notice on which the cursor is positioned).

Next, FIG. 64 is a transition diagram showing in detail the flow of customization on the right side of FIG. First, there are 0 pending, and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, since the predetermined time has passed, the first customization guidance screen is displayed.

Next, since the sub-input button SB was operated while the first customization guide screen was being displayed, the customization screen (advance customization screen) is displayed. By operating the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key SB-2, the cursor is moved, and by operating the sub-input button SB, it is possible to change the occurrence frequency of the notice on which the cursor is positioned. Here, the fox notice (the fox notice and the fox notice of each color will be described later) is selected.

Next, a screen where you can set the occurrence frequency of the fox notice is displayed, and you can select from 1 (occurrence frequency: low) to 5 (occurrence frequency: high) by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2. (the cursor can be moved), and the setting is completed by operating the sub-input button SB (the occurrence frequency of the fox announcement is determined to the occurrence frequency where the cursor is positioned). ing. Note that the occurrence frequency is configured to change by about 20% for each step.

Next, when the setting is completed, the screen in which the fluctuation is stopped is restored, and the characters "Fox premonition customizing" are displayed on the effect display device SG. It should be noted that the first customization guidance screen may be displayed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without progressing the game since the setting was completed.

Next, the change is started, and at this time also, the characters "Fox premonition customizing" are displayed on the effect display device SG.

Next, the variation develops into Super Reach, and when it develops into Super Reach, the characters "Fox Notice Custom" are erased.

(Supplementary notice customization)
The display priority of the display of the customization status currently being set (here, the text of "fox notice customizing") displayed on the effect display device SG is low. Specifically, the display priority is as follows: 2nd decorative design (sub-decorative design) > 1st reserved sub-display > 1st decorative design (main decorative design) > 1st reserved display > relevant change suggestion display > notice > custom status of the display, and has become.

Although it is preferable to configure such that the notice is not displayed in duplicate at the display position of the custom status, it may be configured to be displayed in duplicate. Moreover, although it is preferable to configure so as not to overlap with the first decorative pattern, it may be configured to be displayed in an overlapped manner. As a configuration for overlapping display, for example, while the display of the custom status may be overlapped during the variable display of the first decorative pattern, the display of the custom status may be overlapped during the stop display of the first decorative pattern. It may be configured not to.

In the advance notice customization, only the occurrence frequency and display pattern of the customized advance notice (for example, in the case of customization in which the display pattern can be selected from A pattern, B pattern, and C pattern) is changed, and the display that is not related to the customized notice is displayed. does not change the For example, when the occurrence frequency of the look-ahead effect is changed, neither the background image nor the character image is changed.

The preview customization is individually customizable for multiple previews. For example, the look-ahead effect, the next notice, and the white fox notice can be customized.

Customization in the normal state (non-probability variation gaming state) is preferably configured so as not to be affected in the probability variation gaming state. For example, even if the "normal notice" is customized in the normal state, it is not applied in the probability variation gaming state. Therefore, the advance notice customization may always be configured so that the advance notice in the normal state and the probability fluctuation gaming state can be customized. It may be configured so that customization of the notice during the probability variation gaming state is possible. Also, if you have customized the notice in the normal state and then changed to the probability variable game state (when the game state has changed), or if you have customized the notice in the probability variable game state and then in the normal state In this case, the setting of advance notice customization may be canceled (returned to default).

(Example of advance customization change)
The advance notice customization is configured to continue until the power is turned off, but is not limited to this. It may be until the state changes (when the continuation period elapses, the advance notice customization setting is canceled). Further, after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed in the fluctuation stop state, the effect display device SG displays "Do you want to cancel the current customization setting?" It may also be configured such that advance notice customization is canceled when "Yes" is selected by operating the cross key SB-2.

In addition to the pre-reading effects and normal notices (notices that occur mainly before reach, such as step-up notices and dialogue notices), etc. It may be three of the high-expectation performances).

In addition, it is possible to collectively customize the notices that can occur at a specific time (for example, during Super Reach) (for example, display "Presentation during Super Reach", etc.), and notices that can occur multiple times can be customized collectively (for example, "multiple occurrence notice" is displayed).

It should be noted that a specific notice (for example, notice that a big hit is confirmed, such as a premium notice) may be excluded from the customization target. In addition, it is possible to customize the premier notice, and if there is a customization that increases the occurrence frequency of the premier notice, not only the pattern that increases the occurrence frequency of all premier notices, but also some premier notices with extremely low occurrence probability It is also possible to keep the occurrence frequency unchanged. In other words, even if the effect that occurs at 1/100,000 is doubled to occur at 1/50,000, the player cannot experience the premium notice, so it is difficult for the player to experience it. It is preferable to exclude premium notices, which have an extremely low probability of occurrence, from being customizable.

In a gaming machine with settings (set values), it is preferable to configure the rate of change occurrence frequency to be the same or substantially the same when customization is performed for a certain notice with different set values. . For example, in the case of customizing a red fox, which is a notice that has a different occurrence probability (occurrence frequency) for each setting value, the occurrence frequency of the red fox is less likely to occur with setting 1 (low setting), and 3 (high setting). setting), and when the frequency of occurrence is designed based on the frequency of occurrence 5, if the customization changes from "frequency of occurrence: 5" to "frequency of occurrence: 4", the setting In setting 1, the occurrence frequency of "occurrence frequency: 5" in setting 1 is decreased by 20%, and in setting 3, the occurrence frequency of "occurrence frequency: 5" in setting 3 is decreased by 20%. In this way, it is preferable that the change rate (20%) for one stage of occurrence frequency be common regardless of the set value. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing the set value by setting the advanced notice customization.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65, the denominator of the red fox occurrence probability in setting 1 to setting 3 for each stage of the occurrence frequency may be changed by a certain number. Specifically, the probability of occurrence of red foxes at occurrence frequency 1 is set to 1:1/500, set to 1/490, set to 1/490, and set to 3:1/480. The occurrence probability of the red fox at the occurrence frequency 2 is set 1:1/400, set 2: 1/390, and set 3: 1/380, and the magnitude of the denominator differs by 10 each. The occurrence probability of the red fox at occurrence frequency 3 is set 1:1/300, set 2:1/290, and set 3:1/280, and the magnitude of the denominator differs by 10 each. The occurrence probability of the red fox at occurrence frequency 4 is 1:1/200 for setting, 1/190 for setting 2, and 1/180 for setting 3, and the magnitude of the denominator differs by 10. The occurrence probability of the red fox at occurrence frequency 5 is 1/100 for setting, 1/90 for setting 2, and 1/80 for setting 3, and the magnitude of the denominator differs by 10.

In this manner, the denominator size differs by 10 between setting 1 and setting 2, and the size of the denominator differs by 10 between setting 2 and setting 3 at any stage of the occurrence frequency.

However, at frequency 1, the difference between the red fox occurrence probability of setting 1 and setting 2 and setting 3 is a maximum of 4%, and it is difficult to feel the setting difference. However, at the frequency of occurrence 5, when the red fox occurrence probability of setting 1 is used as the standard, the difference between the occurrence probability of red foxes of setting 2 and setting 3 is 20% at the maximum, making it easy to experience the setting difference. It's becoming Therefore, the player needs to guess the set value from the occurrence probability of the red fox for each stage of occurrence frequency, but setting the occurrence frequency to 5 is advantageous in guessing the set value.

Since the player wants the notice to occur at a probability based on the customized occurrence frequency, the probability of occurrence with a low occurrence frequency at a high setting value (for example, occurrence frequency 1 of setting 3) and the high occurrence frequency at a low setting value (For example, occurrence frequency 2 of setting 1) is preferably configured to be different within a perceptible range, and the occurrence probability of low occurrence frequency (for example, occurrence frequency 1 of setting 3) at a high setting value and occurrence probability It is undesirable for the probabilities of occurrence at high frequencies of occurrence at low settings (eg, frequency of occurrence 2 at setting 1) to be close or identical.

In order to make it difficult to guess the setting value, the probability of occurrence with a low occurrence frequency at a high setting value (for example, the occurrence frequency of setting 3) and the occurrence probability with a low setting value (for example, the occurrence frequency of setting 1) It is effective to make the occurrence probabilities in 2) close or identical.

This embodiment has a configuration that enables advance notice customization even during fluctuations, and this configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 66 .

First, it is currently changing, customization of the fox notice is being performed, and the occurrence frequency of the fox notice is set to "5".

Next, the left button of the cross key SB-2 is operated to change the occurrence frequency of the fox notice to "4".

Next, when five seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the customizable period ends, and the character display of "Fox Notice 4" is erased.

In addition, in this change, the state of customization set at the start of the change is maintained, and the customization changed during the change becomes effective from the next change.

In addition, in the customization during fluctuation, not only is it possible to change the frequency of occurrence of the notice for which customization has already been set, but if the notice is customizable, it is configured to change the occurrence frequency during fluctuation.

Specifically, the customizable advance notice is changed by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, and the occurrence frequency is changed by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to customize the occurrence frequency of the notice at the timing desired by the player without interrupting the game and waiting until the fluctuation stop state.

Next, FIG. 67 is a flow chart of in-game customization control processing relating to the subroutine of step 5350 in FIG. First, at step 5364, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 has been detected. If Yes at step 5364, at step 5366, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the advance notice of customization based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to the next process. On the other hand, if No at step 5364, at step 5368, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 has been detected. If Yes at step 5368, at step 5370, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adjusts the occurrence frequency based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to the next process. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to customize the notice by operating the cross key SB-2 even when it is not a non-game period (during fluctuation). Up and down buttons of , the notice is changed, the right button of the cross key SB-2 increases the occurrence frequency by one step, and the left button of the cross key SB-2 decreases the occurrence frequency by one step.

In-game customization (customization during variation) is possible only in the normal state, and may be disabled in the probability-variable game state, or may be disabled during execution of a big win or a small win. good.

As in the customization of the occurrence probability of the red fox described above, making it possible to change the occurrence probability (occurrence frequency) of the advance notice, which has a different occurrence probability for each set value, is more convenient for the player by changing the occurrence frequency. Although it becomes easier to guess the settings, there is a concern that the degree of advantage between players will change depending on the presence or absence of knowledge. Therefore, with respect to advance notices with different occurrence probabilities (occurrence frequencies) for each set value, the occurrence frequency of notices may be customized so that the occurrence frequency cannot be changed (not included in the change target).

Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 5500 in FIG. First, in step 5502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has received a command (reservation information relating to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) relating to the occurrence of a new suspension from the main control board M side. judge. In the case of Yes in step 5502, in step 5504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S puts " 1” is added. Next, in step 5506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stores the command related to the new suspension validity result and stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side in the temporary storage area of the binding suspension information (sub control board S). area for temporarily storing information related to the hold on the other side). Next, in step 5508, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stores the pending information (especially, the variation mode group, etc.) in the temporary storage area for the pending information, based on the pending generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. Temporarily store. In addition, when the information related to the win/fail result, stop pattern, and variation mode group is not transmitted from the main control board M side, the information is not temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area in step 5506 or step 5508. It will happen. Next, at step 5509, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold is the hold on the first main game side. In the case of Yes at step 5509 , at step 5550 , the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a first main game look-ahead determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 5510 . Next, in step 5510, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not information indicating that the trigger is pending is added to the new hold (added in the process of step 5570), in other words, It is determined whether the new hold is a trigger hold. In the present embodiment, information to the effect that it is a trigger hold is added to the hold that has won the pre-reading lottery. If Yes at step 5510 , at step 5650 , the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes prefetch pending content determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 5520 . Incidentally, if No at step 5509 (if the new hold is a hold on the second main game side) or if No at step 5510 , the process proceeds to step 5520 . Incidentally, in the case of No in step 5509, in step 5509-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the second main game prefetching process (prefetching determination process, prefetching content determination processing, etc.), and shift to the next processing.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5502, in step 5511, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it has received a symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes at step 5511, at step 5512, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts "1" from the drawing pending counter. Next, at step 5514, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the pending information related to the symbol variation (particularly, the win/fail result, the stop symbol information, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number delimiter information). Remove from region and shift remaining pending information. Next, in step 5515, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the change suggestion display in the change suggestion display section SG14 in the same display mode as the display mode immediately before digestion of the digested pending The display mode of the hold made is shifted and displayed as the change suggestive display). Incidentally, the change suggesting display may be referred to as the change suggesting image. In addition, the display mode of the digested suspension immediately before digestion is blue, and when the suspension is digested and the variation suggestion display related to the digested suspension is displayed, the display mode of the variation suggestion display is red. It may be configured such that the display mode of the suspension immediately before digestion and the display mode of the variation suggestive display after digestion of the suspension can be different. In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure such that the display mode of the variation suggestive display after consumption of the hold has a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the display mode of the hold just before the consumption. . It should be noted that the display mode of the hold and the change suggestion display is "white→blue→red→rainbow" in descending order of the degree of expectation for a big hit. Next, at step 5516, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the design content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 5520. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 2520 also in the case of No in step 5511 .

Next, in step 5520, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the same number of pending display images as the setting pending counter value on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first pending display section SG12 and the second pending display section SG13). is displayed in the determined pending display mode (when the pending display mode does not change, the pending display mode is white), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5700).

Next, FIG. 69 is a flow chart of the first main game look-ahead determination process according to the subroutine of step 5550 in FIG. As will be described later, the processes of steps 5554 to 5558 are processes related to prohibitive conditions for the prefetch lottery, and the processes of steps 5560 to 5570 are processes related to the prefetch lottery.

First, at step 5554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (low probability/low base). If Yes at step 5554, at step 5556 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a trigger pending in the pending. In the case of Yes at step 5556, at step 5558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is any hold before the new hold that will result in a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 5558, in step 5560, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold. If Yes in step 5560, it is determined in step 5560-1 whether or not the new suspension is a variation pattern (group 4) that raises the stage level. In the case of Yes in step 5560-1, in step 5562, the CPUSC of the sub control board S increases the level of the winning stage with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3) and determines whether or not there is a big hit in the subsequent hold. A pre-reading lottery including a stage level up (details will be described later) suggesting whether or not is executed, and the process proceeds to step 5568 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5560-1, in step 5562-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a prefetch lottery that does not include stage level-up winning with a predetermined probability (eg, 1/3), and step 5568 processing is started. In addition, in the case of No in step 5560 (that is, the suspension resulting in a failure), in step 5564, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the new suspension is a variation pattern (group 5) that raises the stage level. determine whether If Yes at step 5564 , at step 5566 , the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a look-ahead lottery including stage level-up winning with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10), and proceeds to the process of step 5568 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5564, in step 5566-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a pre-reading lottery that does not include stage level-up winning with a predetermined probability (eg, 1/10), and executes step 5568. Go to processing.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5554, in step 5554-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the current game state is the probability variable game state and the time reduction game state (high probability/high base state). judge. If Yes at step 5554-2, at step 5556-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a trigger pending in the pending. If Yes at step 5556-2, at step 5558-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is any hold before the new hold that will result in a big hit. In the case of Yes at step 5558-2, at step 5560-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold. At step 5572, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a pre-reading lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3), and shifts to the process of step 5568.

Next, at step 5568, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the prefetching lottery executed in the processes of steps 5562, 5562-1, 5566, 5566-1, and 5572 has been won. In the case of Yes at step 5568, at step 5570, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds information to the effect that it is a "trigger hold" to the new hold that has won the prefetch lottery, and proceeds to the next process (step 5510). process). If No in steps 5556, 5558, 5568, 5554-2, 5556-2, 5558-2, and 5560-2, the process proceeds to the next process (step 5510).

Next, FIG. 70 is a configuration diagram of a prefetch lottery table in the prefetch lottery of FIG. In the prefetch lottery table including the stage level-up in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game, one of ID0 to ID2 is determined according to the appropriately distributed lottery value. Next, in the non-probability variable game state and non-time reduction game, in the prefetch lottery table without stage level up, one of ID0 to ID3 is determined according to the appropriately distributed lottery value. In the look-ahead lottery table without the stage level-up, the stage level-up cannot be executed, and it is determined whether or not other look-ahead effects (here, pending change and chance) are to be executed. In addition, the prefetch lottery table shown in this example shows a limited number of types of prefetch effects for the sake of simplicity of explanation. It is configured to determine the look-ahead effect to be executed from the result (ID).

In the prefetching lottery table in the probability variable game state and the time reduction game, in order to determine whether or not to execute a predetermined prefetching effect, a prefetching lottery is performed according to the lottery value distributed as ID0: no prefetching effect, ID1: with prefetching effect. is done.

Next, FIG. 71 is a flow chart of the prefetch pending content determination process according to the subroutine of step 5650 in FIG. First, at step 5654, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is a look-ahead effect during the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state. In the case of Yes at step 5654, at step 5656, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the pending change is won. In the case of Yes in step 5656, in step 5658, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the pending change scenario determination table based on the success/fail result, and based on the number of pending events at the time of occurrence of trigger pending, suspends multiple changes until trigger pending. determine pending change scenarios for changing . On the other hand, if step 5656 is No, go to step 5660 .

Next, at step 5660, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the chance has been won (details of the lottery and effects for the chance will be described later). In the case of Yes in step 5660, in step 5662, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the chance scenario determination table based on the success/fail result, and selects a chance scenario for displaying a chance scenario in multiple variations until the trigger is suspended. to decide. On the other hand, if step 5660 is No, the process proceeds to step 5664 .

Next, at step 5664, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stage level-up (lottery and effects for the stage level-up will be detailed later) is won. In the case of Yes in step 5660, in step 5662, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stage level-up determination table based on the pass/fail result, and raises the stage level in multiple fluctuations until trigger suspension. Determine the scenario and move to the next process. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5664 as well, the process proceeds to the next process.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5654 (=probability variation gaming state and time reduction gaming state), in step 5668, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect contents according to the variation mode (variation mode group), and then to process. Details of the content of the effect (read-ahead effect in the probability variable game state and the time reduction game state) will be described later.

Next, FIG. 72 is an example of a pending change scenario determination table. In the same figure, there are a hold change scenario determination table (at the time of a big hit) that is referenced when the trigger hold is a hold that will result in a big hit, and a hold change scenario determination table that is referenced when the trigger hold is a hold that will result in a loss ( At the time of loss) will be described in detail. The item "at the time of occurrence" is the pending display mode when the trigger pending occurs, and the item "before 3 changes" is the pending display mode at the end of the pattern change 3 changes before the pattern change related to the trigger hold. The item "before 2 fluctuations" is the pending display mode at the end of the pattern fluctuations 2 fluctuations before the pattern fluctuations related to the trigger holding, and the item "before 1 fluctuation" is the pattern 1 fluctuation before the pattern fluctuations related to the trigger holding. This is the pending display mode at the end of fluctuation. For example, when "before 3 fluctuations" is "blue" and "before 2 fluctuations" is "blue", during the pattern fluctuations before the 2 fluctuations of the pattern fluctuations related to the trigger holding, the holding change as a holding change fan effect (change of display mode of suspension) is executed, and when "before 3 fluctuations" is "blue" and "before 2 fluctuations" is "red", 2 of symbol fluctuations related to trigger suspension It is configured to execute an effect that succeeds in the pending change (change in the display mode of the pending) during the symbol change before the change. The pending change scenario is selected by random numbers, and the pending change is executed in the middle of the symbol variation (it may be configured so that the pending change occurs at the start of the symbol variation). In addition, the display mode of the pending trigger is "blue → red → rainbow color" in descending order of the degree of expectation for the big hit. It is configured to change to a high degree display mode. In addition, "rainbow color" is not selected as a display mode when the pending trigger is lost, so if the display mode of the pending trigger is "rainbow color", it is almost certain that the pending trigger will be a big hit. target. Here, if the pending change is executed in a situation where the display mode of the pending trigger is "red", the display mode of the pending trigger becomes rainbow color. When the pending change stimulating effect is executed at , the player will have expectations that the pending change stimulating effect will be successful. In this example, four types of pending display modes, ie, "white", "blue", "red", and "rainbow", are not limited to this, and the number of types may be increased. However, the changing element may indicate that the hold has changed by shape or lighting/blinking, rather than by color. Further, as a display mode suggesting a future change in hold, for example, a hold in the shape of a treasure box may be displayed, and then the treasure box may be opened to change the hold display mode after the change.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 5700 in FIG. First, at step 5702, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the design content determination permission flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 5702, in step 5704, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the design content determination permission flag. Next, in step 5706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the temporarily stored symbol information (stop symbol/variation mode related to the main game symbol), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, the stop symbol related to the main game symbol If the pattern is a jackpot pattern, doubles such as "7, 7, 7", and if it is a losing pattern, a loose pattern such as "1, 3, 5"} and the variation mode are determined and sub-control is performed. Temporarily stored in the RAM area of the substrate S.

Next, at step 5300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the effect content determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 5714, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the design content determination flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5800).

Next, FIG. 74 is a flow chart of effect content determination processing relating to the subroutine of step 5300 of FIG. First, at step 5308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a trigger pending in the pending. In the case of Yes in step 5308, in step 5310, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the contents of the effect related to the symbol variation based on the stop symbol and variation mode of the decorative symbol, and performs the next process (step 5714). transition to

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5308, in step 5312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not to execute the fan effect. In the case of Yes in step 5312, in step 5314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the content of the effect related to the symbol variation to be a pending change effect effect, and refers to the pending change effect effect determination table to determine whether the effect has been determined. Based on the pending change fanning scenario, the performance mode of the pending change fanning effect related to the change is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 5714). In addition, in the case of No in step 5312, in step 5316, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the determined execution timing of the pending change success effect, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern and the variation mode, the effect related to the symbol change The content is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5714).

Next, FIG. 75 is a flow chart of the decorative design display control process related to the subroutine of step 5800 in FIG. First, at step 5802, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the design content determination flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 5802, in step 5804, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the design content determination flag. Next, at step 5806, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol-fluctuation flag. Next, at step 5809, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the design variation time management timer, and proceeds to step 5810. It should be noted that even if No in step 5802 , the process proceeds to step 5810 .

Next, at step 5810, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol-fluctuation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 5810, in step 5811, the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the timer value of the design variation time management timer. Next, at step 5812, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timing for starting variation of the decorative symbols has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5812, in step 5814, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the variable display command of the decorative pattern (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 5999). , to step 5823 .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5812, in step 5816, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the temporary stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the decorative symbols has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 5816, at step 5818, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the decorative pattern stop display command (temporary stop display command) (in the display command transmission control process at step 5999, the sub-sub control unit SS side ), and the process proceeds to step 5823 .

In the case of No in step 5816, in step 5820, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the display timing of the preview image and reach image has been reached based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 5820, in step 5822, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the image display command for the preview image and reach image (in the display command transmission control process in step 5999, the sub-sub control unit SS side transmitted), and the process proceeds to step 5823. It should be noted that even if No in step 5820 , the process proceeds to step 5823 . Next, in step 5823, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stage level-up timing has been reached. If Yes at step 5823 , at step 5824 , the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes level up of the stage, and proceeds to step 5830 .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5823, in step 5825, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the execution start timing of pending change has been reached. Here, in this process, it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined timing in the symbol variation in which either the pending change success effect or the pending change unsuccessful effect is executed. In the case of Yes in step 5825, in step 5826, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the pending change execution start flag (the flag that is turned on when reaching the execution timing of the pending change successful effect or the pending change unsuccessful effect). do. Next, at step 5827, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the pending change execution start flag is ON. If Yes at step 5827 , at step 6050 , the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes pending change execution processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to processing at step 5830 . It should be noted that even if the result of step 5827 is No, the process proceeds to step 5830 . Further, if No in step 5825, in step 5828, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the execution timing of the variation suggestive display change effect has been reached. Here, in this process, it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined timing in the symbol variation in which either the variation suggesting display change success effect or the variation suggesting display change failure effect is executed. In the case of Yes at step 5828 , at step 5829 , the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the variation suggestive display change effect, and proceeds to the process of step 5830 . Here, if the variation suggestion display change effect to be executed is the variation suggestion display change success effect, a character appears, the display mode of the variation suggestion display changes, and the variation suggestion display change effect to be executed is changed. In the case of the variation suggestive display change failure effect, a character appears and the display mode of the variation suggestive display does not change. Incidentally, the effect mode of the change suggestive display change success effect is such a effect mode that the display mode of the change suggestive display changes at a predetermined timing during the execution of the pattern change, and the sub-input button SB, etc. The display mode of the variation suggestive display is changed without the operation of the operating member. If No at step 5828, at step 5840, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the display timing for the second chance has arrived. In the case of Yes in step 5840, in step 5841, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the display of the chance number, and shifts to the process of step 5830. FIG. Note that if the result in step 5840 is No, the process proceeds to step 5840 as well.

Next, at step 5830, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the main game symbols are stop-displayed. In the case of Yes at step 5830, at step 5831, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the decorative symbol stop display command (determined display command) (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process at step 5999). be done). Next, at step 5832, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops and resets (clears to zero) the design variation time management timer. Next, at step 5834, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol-fluctuation flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 5900). Note that even if No in step 5810 or step 5830, the process proceeds to the next process (step 5900).

Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of pending change execution processing according to the subroutine of step 6050 of FIG. First, at step 6052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the pending change execution flag (flag that turns on at the timing when the pending change successful effect or the pending change unsuccessful effect is executed) is off. do. If Yes at step 6052, at step 6054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the pending change executing flag. Next, at step 6056, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a character as a pending change effect. Next, at step 6058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a button image prompting the operation of the sub-input button SB. Next, in step 6060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a predetermined value (for example, 3 seconds) to a change effect timer (decrement timer) to start it, and proceeds to step 6062. It should be noted that even if No in step 6052 , the process proceeds to step 6062 .

Next, at step 6062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. If Yes in step 6062 , go to step 6066 . On the other hand, if No at step 6062, at step 6064, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the change effect timer is zero. If Yes in step 6064 , go to step 6066 . Next, at step 6066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S outputs, as the pending change, an effect in which the character changes the pending change in the case of the pending change successful effect, or the character changes to the pending change in the case of the pending change unsuccessful effect. Perform a failed rendition. Next, at step 6068, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the pending change executing flag. Next, at step 6070, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the pending change effect execution start flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5830). Note that even if No in step 6064, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5830). As described above, in the present embodiment, a button image prompting the user to operate the sub-input button SB is displayed when the pending change is executed, and the sub-input button SB is operated while the button image is being displayed (for 3 seconds), or When the display period of the button image ends (elapses of 3 seconds), the pending change is executed in the case of the pending change successful effect. It should be noted that, if the display period of the button image ends without the sub-input button SB being operated, the pending change may not be executed.

Next, FIG. 77 is an image diagram of pending change execution in this embodiment. First, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbols are variably displayed. In this example, the number of holds is 3, and the trigger hold related to the hold change is the second hold (in other words, after 2 changes in the design change, the design change related to the trigger hold is executed. is done). Further, the display mode of the trigger suspension is "white".

Next, a character (in this example, a lion) is displayed as a pending change effect, and a button image prompting the user to operate the sub-input button SB is displayed.

Next, if the sub-input button SB is not operated within a predetermined period of time (three seconds in this example) after the character and button images are displayed, the character and button images disappear, and the display mode of pending is It does not change (the pending display mode remains "white").

On the other hand, if the sub-input button SB is operated within a predetermined period of time (three seconds in this example) after the character and button images are displayed, a hold change (success) or a hold change effect (success) is performed. either is executed. When the hold change (success) is executed, as an effect for the character to change the hold, the lion touches the hold display related to the trigger hold, and the display mode of the hold changes from "white" to "red". . If the pending change (failure) is executed, the lion sheds tears as an effect in which the character fails the pending change, and the display mode of the suspension does not change (the display mode of the suspension remains “white”). maintained).

Here, in the present embodiment, as an effect mode of the hold change, the hold change swaying effect through the operation of the sub-input button SB (the effect including the effect of prompting the operation of the sub-input button SB) and the operation of the sub-input button SB. (a production that does not include an effect prompting the operation of the sub-input button SB), and the suspension change-introduction effect that does not involve the operation of the sub-input button SB does not occur at the start of the fluctuation. Even in this case, the effect of prompting the operation of the sub-input button SB is suddenly executed during the fluctuation, so the player can expect the pending change at a plurality of timings. In addition, by providing a plurality of production modes related to the change of hold, various productions can occur in the period from the occurrence of the hold to the start of the pattern change related to the hold, which increases the interest of the game. It can be improved further.

Next, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 5900 of FIG. First, at step 5902, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 5902, in step 5904, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes at step 5904, at step 5912, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the special game flag. Next, in step 5914, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the start of the big hit, and proceeds to step 5916. On the other hand, if the result in step 5902 is No, the process proceeds to step 5916 as well.

Next, at step 5916, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to sequentially display the number of rounds and the number of wins. Next, at step 5926, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes at step 5926, at step 5928, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command relating to the big hit end display on the effect display device SG (appropriate display is performed based on the type of big win). Next, at step 5930, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the special game in-progress flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5999). Note that even if No in step 5904 or step 5926, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5999).

<Game state transition diagram>
Next, the main game state transitions in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

First, at normal times (low probability / low base), the first special pattern (first main game pattern) becomes a big hit (big bonus or normal bonus), high probability / high base (standby mode, or short time with some hits mode), high probability or low probability / high base (time saving mode).

In addition, the big bonus is a big hit that wins in the battle production during the big hit and shifts to the standby mode, which is a high probability / high base, and the normal bonus is a draw or defeat in the battle production during the big hit, It is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving mode that is probability/high base or low probability/high base.

In the high base state, the distribution member FB of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is in the second mode during most of the period during the ball easy state (during opening) of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10, and the game ball It is easy to enter the first open ball entrance N1, and when a game ball enters the first open ball entrance N1, the first non-electric accessory HD-1 is opened (see FIG. 26).

When the game ball enters the first non-electric role HD-1 (first main game start port A10-2), the first special symbol starts, so the first special symbol (first main game symbol) wins or fails A lottery will be held.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the normal state (low probability/low base), the high base state is reached after the end of any jackpot, and even after the high base state. , It becomes a game state in which the winning lottery is mainly performed by the first special symbol.

Next, in the high probability/high base, when the first special symbol wins the jackpot and the jackpot variation starts, the game state is changed from the high base to the low base, resulting in a high probability/low base. (See steps 1419-1 through 1419-3 of FIG. 30).

Here, since the gaming machine in the present embodiment is capable of parallel lottery, even if the first special symbol (sometimes referred to as the first main game symbol) is fluctuating, the second special symbol (second (May be referred to as the main game symbol) can be changed to a winning lottery and a change, so the game state will be changed to a winning lottery based on the second special symbol.

Specifically, at a low base, the distribution member FB of the auxiliary game electric role object E10 is in the first mode during most of the period during the easy-entering state (during opening) of the auxiliary game electric role object E10. (See FIG. 26), it is easy for the game ball to enter the second open ball entrance N2, and when the game ball enters the second open ball entrance N2, the second non-electric accessory HD-2 is activated. Open.

When the game ball enters the second non-electric accessory HD-2 (second main game start port B10), the second special symbol starts, so the winning lottery in the second special symbol (second main game symbol) done.

In the high probability/low base (during the first special symbol big hit fluctuation), when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the second special symbol is varied, and the second special symbol variation time. is relatively short (in this example, small hit: 1.5 seconds, loss: 1.5 seconds) is configured to be easily selected (in addition, during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol The lottery result of the second special symbol that started to fluctuate will not be a big hit).

In addition, even if the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 with a low probability/low base, the fluctuation time at the time of the small hit and the loss is long (240 seconds in this example). It is configured to make it difficult to receive the lottery continuously. That is, in the high probability / high base state, when the first special symbol jackpot variation starts, although the auxiliary game time reduction flag is turned off at the start of the variation and the opening mode of the auxiliary game electric role product E10 changes, the main game By maintaining the time saving flag (or changing it to the main game time saving flag corresponding to the high probability/low base), regarding the determination of the variation pattern related to the variation display of the second special symbol, during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is configured to facilitate selection of short-time fluctuations in .

By constructing in this way, on a high probability/low base, when the first special pattern continues the big hit fluctuation, the success or failure lottery (lottery for small win or loss) by the second special pattern is performed a plurality of times. is configured to allow

The second special symbol, as shown in the main game table 1 in FIG. 31, is configured to win a small hit (approximately 1/1.03), and is the second special symbol in the high probability/low base (rush mode). Since the variation pattern at the time of the small hit of the special symbol is set for a short period of time (1.5 seconds in this example), it is configured so that the small hit occurs frequently. (In FIG. 31, the probability of winning a big hit is shown as the second main game lottery table, but in a high probability/low base state where the first special symbol is Even if the random number is within the range of

In the small hit, the big winning hole for the small win (second big winning hole C20) is opened and closed in an open pattern of 1.8 seconds open → closed, and about 3 balls enter during this period (game balls are placed in the second It is configured such that when the ball is continuously shot toward the big winning opening C20. Therefore, 3 (balls)×5 (prize balls)=15 balls can be obtained with one small hit. (Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 1, upstream of the second big winning port C20, auxiliary game electric role E10, first non-electric role HD-1, second non-electric role HD-2 and illustrated In view of the fact that the number of arrivals of game balls is limited as shown in FIG. The design value may be changed as appropriate, such as setting the number of prize balls per hit to 15 and setting the design value to include one ball per small hit (acquisition of 15 prize balls).)

In other words, although the details will be described later, the period of high probability/low base (rush mode) is determined by the fluctuation time of the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation, so the longer the fluctuation time of the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation, It is configured so that the period during which the ball can be obtained by the small hit of the second special symbol becomes longer.

On the other hand, in the high-probability or low-probability/high-base (time-saving mode), when the actually determined game state is high-probability/high-base, the first special symbol wins the jackpot and the jackpot variation starts. When you do, it becomes a high probability / low base and enters rush mode.

In high probability or low probability / high base (time saving mode), when the game state actually determined is high probability / high base, when the predetermined number of time saving times (30 times or 60 times) is reached, The performance mode shifts to the standby mode while the game state remains in the high probability/high base state.

In addition, in the high probability or low probability / high base (time saving mode), if the game state actually determined is low probability / high base, the predetermined number of times of time saving (30 times or 60 times) is reached If you do, it will shift to normal (low probability/low base).

In the rush mode, the predetermined second special symbol's small winning symbol stop period (small winning start demonstration time 0.1 seconds + small winning opening time 1.8 seconds + small winning ending demonstration time 0.1 seconds = 2 Seconds), in other words, during the operation of the special electric role (during the small winning game) in which the second large winning opening C20 is opened, the big winning variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, and the stop period of the small winning symbol When is finished, the big hit variation is resumed.

Next, when the big hit variation of the first special symbol is stopped, the variation of the second special symbol (losing variation or small winning variation) is forcibly stopped at the losing symbol when it is changing, and the big hit of the first special symbol is stopped. A big hit production (round battle) is started.

If you win the jackpot production (round battle) in the first special symbol, you will switch to high probability / high base (standby mode), and if you lose the jackpot production (round battle), you will have a high probability or low probability / high base. (time saving mode).

With this configuration, the rush mode in which small wins frequently occur continues for the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, so that the duration of the rush mode can be secured for a certain period without depending on the probability of big wins. It becomes possible.

<Characteristics of fluctuation pattern>
Next, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation in the high probability/high base, which is the period of the high probability/low base (rush mode) described above, will be described with reference to FIG.

In the jackpot pattern α2 in the setting 3 in this embodiment, when the variation pattern random number is 0 to 255, the variation mode A20 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 30 seconds. Although the details will be described later, the effect of the rush mode is one set (hit).

When the variation pattern random number is 256-699, the variation mode A21 is selected and the variation time is set to 60 seconds. The effect of the rush mode is 2 sets (hit).

When the variation pattern random number is 700 to 899, variation mode A22 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 90 seconds. The effect of the rush mode is 3 sets (hit).

When the fluctuation pattern random number is 900-989, the fluctuation mode A23 is selected and the fluctuation time is determined to be 120 seconds. The effect of the rush mode is 4 sets (hit).

When the fluctuation pattern random number is 990 to 1023, the fluctuation mode A24 is selected and the fluctuation time is determined to be 150 seconds. The effect of the rush mode is 5 sets (hit). In addition, the variation mode A24 (150 seconds, 5 sets per set) definitively informs that the jackpot pattern will have a high probability of α2 during the jackpot variation (it is determined that winning the round battle during the jackpot game is definite). It is configured so that it can be selected only when

In addition, as shown by the random number setting of the variation mode A20 in the jackpot patterns α1, α2, and α3 (when α1: number 500, when α2: number 700, and when α3: number 256), the big hit ends It can be understood that the variation time of the variation mode A20 (variation time of 30 seconds) is relatively more likely to be selected when the probability becomes low later, and when the probability becomes low after the jackpot ends, the variation time It can be said that the configuration is such that short fluctuation patterns are relatively easily selected. In other words, it can be said that a variation pattern with a long variation time is relatively likely to be selected when the probability is high after the end of the big win.

Next, an example of the variation pattern selection ratio based on the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 34 . Here, the lottery table for determining the variation mode of settings 1 to 3 in the big hit symbol α1 will be described.

First, in the lottery table for determining the variation mode of the jackpot symbol α1 in setting 3, when the variation pattern random number is 0 to 499, the variation mode A20 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 30 seconds.

When the fluctuation pattern random number is 500-699, the fluctuation mode A21 is selected and the fluctuation time is determined to be 60 seconds.

When the variation pattern random number is 700 to 899, variation mode A22 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 90 seconds.

When the fluctuation pattern random number is 900 to 1023, the fluctuation mode A23 is selected and the fluctuation time is determined to be 120 seconds.

Note that the variation mode A24 is not selected. (The jackpot pattern α1 is in a high probability / high base state as a game state after the jackpot game, but the production mode shifts to the time saving mode, and the display on the production is not the standby mode, but the production display for the time saving mode. In order to execute the effect of shifting to the standby mode at the 30th or 60th fluctuation after the big win game, which is suggested to end the time-saving mode in appearance, the transition to the high-probability state is definitely notified 5. to prevent the execution of the set.)

Next, in the lottery table for determining the variation mode of the jackpot symbol α1 in the setting 2, when the variation pattern random number is 0 to 599, the variation mode A20 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 30 seconds.

When the variation pattern random number is 600 to 699, the variation mode A21 is selected and the variation time is set to 60 seconds.

When the variation pattern random number is 700 to 899, variation mode A22 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 90 seconds.

When the fluctuation pattern random number is 900 to 1023, the fluctuation mode A23 is selected and the fluctuation time is determined to be 120 seconds.

Note that the variation mode A24 is not selected.

Next, in the lottery table for determining the variation mode of the jackpot symbol α1 in the setting 1, when the variation pattern random number is 0 to 699, the variation mode A20 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 30 seconds.

When the variation pattern random number is 700-799, the variation mode A21 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 60 seconds.

When the fluctuation pattern random number is 800-899, the fluctuation mode A22 is selected and the fluctuation time is determined to be 90 seconds.

When the fluctuation pattern random number is 900 to 1023, the fluctuation mode A23 is selected and the fluctuation time is determined to be 120 seconds.

Note that the variation mode A24 is not selected.

In this way, in the case of setting 1, the variation mode A20 with the short variation time is relatively likely to be selected, and in the case of setting 3, the variation mode A20 with the short variation time compared to settings 1 and 2 are relatively difficult to select.

That is, the higher the set value (high setting), the easier it is to select a variation mode (variation pattern) with a longer variation time, and the lower the set value (low setting), the shorter the variation mode (variation pattern). is relatively easy to select, it is possible to solve the problem that the higher the setting in the conventional small-hit frequent occurrence mode, the easier it is to win a big hit and the easier the small-hit frequent occurrence mode ends. It can be configured so that the profit in the small hit frequency mode increases as the setting increases.

<High-probability/low-base (rush mode) variation control>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, variation control during high probability/low base will be described.

First, as described above, in the high-probability/high-base (standby mode), a jackpot is won with the first special symbol, and the high-probability/low-base (rush mode) is started by starting the jackpot variation.

In the high-probability/low-base (rush mode), it becomes easier to enter the second main game start port B10, and the second special symbols frequently fluctuate, resulting in a small hit (approximately 1/1.03).

In FIG. 80, after entering the high probability/low base (rush mode), the first variation of the second special symbol is performed. Since the first variation is a small winning variation, it stops in 1.5 seconds, and the big winning opening for small winning (second big winning opening C20) is opened for 1.8 seconds. The period during which the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed (small winning start demonstration time 0.1 seconds + second big winning opening opening time 1.8 seconds + small winning end demonstration time 0.1 seconds = total 2 seconds) is the first When the period (2 seconds) during which the small winning patterns are stopped and displayed passes, the next variation of the second special pattern becomes possible and the big winning variation of the first special pattern is restarted.

Immediately after that, the variation of the next second special symbol is started. This change is a loss and stops in 1.5 seconds, and since it is a loss, the second big prize winning opening C20 is not opened and remains closed. At this time, the variation of the big hit of the first special symbol is continued without a temporary stop.

That is, when the second special symbol is a small hit, the big hit variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, but when the second special symbol is a loss, the big hit variation of the first special symbol is not temporarily stopped. ing. Therefore, the more you win a small hit with the second special symbol, the higher the probability/lower base (rush mode) period (the period from the start of the first special symbol big hit variation display to the stop display) It will be long.

<Number of winning balls in rush mode>
Next, the number of winning balls in the high probability/low base (rush mode) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 35, the variation time of the small hit variation pattern (variation mode B20) and the variation time of the losing variation pattern (variation mode b3) of the second special symbol in the high probability/low base (rush mode) are both 1.5. seconds.

Since the big hit variation of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit, the number of acquired balls in the high probability/low base (rush mode) can be calculated by the following formula.
[formula]
(1st special pattern jackpot fluctuation time / small hit fluctuation time) x 1 small hit prize ball expectation x small hit winning probability

For example, when the first special symbol big hit variation time is 150 seconds,
(150 (seconds) / 1.5 (seconds)) x {3 (number of balls entered) x 5 (number of prized balls in the second grand prize opening C20)} x (1/1.03)
= 100 x 15 x 0.97...
≒ 1456 (pieces)
Thus, when the first special symbol jackpot variation time is 150 seconds, it is calculated that 1456 balls can be obtained in the high probability/low base (rush mode).

In this example, the number of winning balls in one big win is 10 (count) x 10 (round) x 15 (the number of winning balls in the first big winning hole C10) = 1500 (pieces). , On the design value, the number of winning balls (1500) for one big win is configured to be larger than the maximum number of winning balls (about 1456) for small wins in high probability/low base (rush mode). ing.

With such a configuration, it is possible to obtain a maximum of about two jackpots by the small wins and the big wins in the rush mode. It is preferable that the number of balls obtained in the possible game state is designed to be smaller than the number of balls obtained in one big win. In addition, in the above-described calculation formula, the stop display fixed time provided to indicate to the player that the second special symbol is lost after the variable display of the second special symbol is not calculated. The stop display fixed time at the time of losing is set to 0.5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the second special pattern losing variation in the high probability / low base state is set to 1.0 seconds, etc. It may be designed so that the consumption during the rush mode period is the same.

<High Probability / Low Base (During Rush Mode) Loss Probability>
Next, high-probability/low-base (during rush mode) loss probabilities will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, this embodiment is capable of parallel lottery, but is configured so as not to simultaneously achieve a big hit in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the high probability/low base, the lottery is mainly performed in the first special symbol. When a big hit is won in the first special pattern, lottery processing is executed after the result of the lottery of the first special pattern is determined as a big win. Later, it is forcibly rewritten as a losing one (In addition, if it is determined that the other special symbol will be a big hit, it may be configured to draw a lottery at a lottery table that does not win the big hit, and the two special symbols Any method may be used as long as it can be controlled so as not to cause a big hit at the same time in the pattern).

For example, when the probability of the second special symbol in the setting 1 is high, the random number 0 to 63499: small hit, the random number 63500 to 65344: big hit, the random number 65345 to 65535: loss, and the big hit is won in the first special symbol. Then, random numbers 63500 to 65344: If you win a big hit, it will be rewritten as a loss. In other words, substantially, random numbers 0 to 63499: small win, random numbers 63500 to 65535: loss.

Similarly, when the probability of the second special symbol in the setting 3 is high, the random number 0 to 63499 is a small hit, the random number 63500 to 65479 is a big hit, and the random number 65480 to 65535 is a loss, and the first special symbol is a big hit. If you win, random numbers 63500 to 65479: big hit, if you win, rewrite to lose. In other words, substantially, random numbers 0 to 63499: small win, random numbers 63500 to 65535: loss.

In other words, regardless of the set value, the random number value is 63500 to 65535: Loss, but if it was originally in the range of a big hit, that is, the first special symbol is a big hit, so it is rewritten from a big hit to a loss. In this case, an effect suggesting the set value (for example, light emission of a predetermined lamp) may be performed so that the player can guess the set value.

By configuring in this way, the higher the setting, the larger the range of the big hit, so that the effect suggesting the set value can be easily generated. In addition, when limited to the case where the random value range that originally becomes a big hit is lost, the execution frequency of the effect that suggests the setting value during rush mode will be the same as the probability of a big hit in normal time, and even in the high probability state You can set the effect that occurs with the same probability as the big hit, and you can create an event that can occur with one probability according to the set value across the high probability state and normal time, and even in the high probability state, normal time It is possible to provide information useful for estimating the probability of a big hit (the number of executions of an effect suggesting a set value, which is information substituting for the number of times of a normal jackpot). In addition, as a modified example, not only the range that originally becomes a big hit, but also in the loss variation according to the random number range of 63500 to 65535, which is a loss regardless of the set value, a notice that suggests the same set value is executed. You may

<Low probability / high base electric role open pattern and special figure fluctuation time>
Next, the case where the first special symbol hits the jackpot during the low-probability/high-base will be described.

First, during the low probability / high base, the opening pattern of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is 0.2 seconds open → 1.6 seconds closed → 5.8 seconds open → closed (if necessary 26).

If the jackpot is won with the first special symbol during the low probability/high base, the high base changes to the low base when the jackpot variation starts, resulting in a low probability/low base (from step 1419-1 in FIG. 30). (see step 1419-3). In the low probability/low base, the opening pattern of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is 1.6 seconds open→0.2 seconds closed→0.2 seconds open→closed.

In other words, it is possible to observe the opening pattern of the auxiliary game electric role product E10 at the low probability/high base, and to grasp that the opening pattern of the auxiliary game electric role product E10 has changed to the low probability/low base. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the player has won the jackpot.

In addition, since the performance display device SG is configured to display "Right shot" when the base is high, it is possible to grasp whether or not the player has won the jackpot even in this display. In other words, when you win the jackpot with the first special symbol at low probability/high base, and when it becomes low probability/low base, the display of "Right shot" is erased or "Please hit left" is displayed. be done.

Therefore, when the first special symbol becomes a big hit at a low probability/high base, the long variation pattern (variation mode with a long variation time) is performed to arouse the interest of the player. may not be very connected.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot variation pattern (variation mode A10) of the first special symbol in the low probability / high base is set to a short time (3 seconds) so that the jackpot game is immediately started, and the auxiliary game The configuration eliminates the need to bother to observe the opening pattern of the electric accessory E10 and the display of "right-handed".

In addition, even if the first special symbol wins the jackpot on a low probability/high base, the display of "Right shot" may be continued, and "Left shot please" may not be displayed. .

In addition, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates whether to hit left or right (for example, if a predetermined LED is lit, it indicates that you should hit right, If it is turned off, it indicates that you should hit left), normally (for example, when the main game probability variation flag, auxiliary game time saving flag, and special game execution flag are all off), you should always hit left. Suggesting that there is, except for normal times (for example, when at least one of the main game probability variable flag, auxiliary game time saving flag, and special game execution flag is on). is appropriate.

<Display screen of high probability/high base (standby mode)>
Next, the high-probability/high-base (standby mode) display screen will be described with reference to the upper diagram of FIG.

In the high probability / high base (standby mode), the effect display device SG has
1. 1st special pattern Resident decorative pattern (sub-decorative pattern) ⇒ Lower left side of the LCD screen 2. 2nd special pattern Resident decorative pattern (sub-decorative pattern) ⇒ Lower left side of the LCD screen 3. 1st special symbol Reserved display ⇒ Right middle row of the LCD screen 4. 2nd special symbol reserved display ⇒Right middle row of the LCD screen 5. Right-handed instruction display ⇒ Upper right side of the LCD screen 6. Production mode display ⇒ Upper left side of the LCD screen 7. 1st special pattern Decorative pattern (main decorative pattern) ⇒ Roughly in the center of the LCD screen8. Production meter A ⇒ Lower right side of the LCD screen 9. Cumulative number of balls displayed ⇒ Lower right side of the LCD screen 10. Display the number of consecutive houses ⇒ Center upper part of the LCD screen 11. Jackpot result icon (total of jackpot balls + rush mode balls) ⇒Added from the left to the right in the middle of the LCD screen.

The first special symbol resident decorative pattern (sub decorative pattern) is a decorative pattern that is always displayed among the decorative patterns that are displayed on the liquid crystal screen while the first special pattern is fluctuating or stopped. The second special symbol resident decorative symbol is a decorative symbol that is displayed on the liquid crystal screen while the second special symbol is fluctuating or stopped, and is a decorative symbol that is always displayed. The first special symbol reserved display is a reserved number display of the first special symbols displayed on the liquid crystal screen. The second special symbol reserved display is a reserved number display of the second special symbols displayed on the liquid crystal screen. The right-handed instruction display is a display that is displayed at a high base and instructs the player where to shoot the game ball. The effect mode display is a display indicating the staying effect mode. The first special symbol decorative symbol (main decorative symbol) is a decorative symbol that is displayed so as to be easily recognized by the player among the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal screen while the first special symbol is fluctuating or stopped. be. The performance meter A is a display for suggesting the number of sets (=jackpot variation time) in the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, details of which will be described later. The display of the accumulated number of obtained balls is a display of the total number of obtained balls obtained in the consecutive games, and the sum of the number of obtained balls obtained in the big hit and the number of obtained balls in the rush mode is displayed. The display of the number of consecutive homes is a display indicating the number of consecutive jackpots (the number of consecutive homes). The jackpot result icon indicates the total number of obtained balls obtained in one jackpot and one rush mode in units of one jackpot and one rush mode.

The display screen of the standby mode A is displayed until the big hit variation starts with the first special symbol. More specifically, the big hit variation is started with the first special symbol, and a specific symbol (eg, "Rush mode" is written in the main decorative symbol area of the effect display device SG or substantially in the center of the effect display device SG). The display screen of the standby mode A is displayed until the symbol) is displayed.

In other words, the display of the specific pattern serves as a trigger for shifting to the display screen of the rush mode, and the specific pattern is configured to be displayed about 6 seconds after the start of the big hit variation of the first special pattern.

The specific symbol is displayed in the display area of ``7. Also in the display area, the specific pattern is displayed with shaking fluctuation.

In addition, in the display area of ``1. )” display area or approximately in the center of the screen, the variable display is continuously displayed in the display area of “1. may be configured as follows.

Further, it may be configured to indicate whether or not the big hit is a variable probability hit by an effect displayed in conjunction with the display of the specific symbol. For example, it may be configured such that the probability variation expectation increases in the order of blue effect, green effect, and red effect.

<High probability / low base (rush mode A) display screen>
Next, the high probability/low base (rush mode A) display screen will be described with reference to the middle diagram of FIG. Rush modes include rush mode A and rush mode B, which the player can select by operating the sub-input button SB and/or the cross key SB-2. In addition, the production mode selection of the rush mode can be selected when the big hit game that enters the standby mode is being executed (for example, during the jackpot end demonstration period). . Although not shown, in the standby mode when the rush mode B is selected, the effect meter A in the standby mode A is replaced with the effect meter B and the lamp image shown in the lower diagram, and the mode is changed according to the mode. A background effect image is displayed.

In the high probability / low base (rush mode A), the effect display device SG has
1. 1st special pattern Resident decorative pattern (sub-decorative pattern) ⇒ Lower left side of the LCD screen 2. 2nd special pattern Resident decorative pattern (sub-decorative pattern) ⇒ Lower left side of the LCD screen 3. 1st special symbol Reserved display ⇒ Right middle row of the LCD screen 4. 2nd special symbol reserved display ⇒Right middle row of the LCD screen 5. Right-handed instruction display ⇒ Upper right side of the LCD screen 6. Production mode display ⇒ Upper left side of the LCD screen 7. 2nd special pattern Decorative pattern (main decorative pattern) ⇒ Slightly above the center lower row of the LCD screen 8. Production meter A ⇒ Lower right side of the LCD screen 9. Cumulative number of acquired balls display ⇒ The lower right side of the LCD screen is displayed.

The second special pattern decorative pattern (main decorative pattern) is a decorative pattern that is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it, among the decorative patterns that are displayed on the liquid crystal screen while the second special pattern is fluctuating or stopped. be.

The effect in the rush mode is composed of one set of 30 seconds (maximum of 5 sets=150 seconds), and it is configured to execute the continuous fan effect for each set. When the continuous fanning effect is executed, the display of "7. Second special symbol, decorative symbol (main decorative symbol)" is not performed, and it is configured to draw attention to the continuous fanning effect. In addition, one set of "30 seconds" is assumed to be 30 seconds in the elapsed time of the first special symbol big hit variation that has been shifted to the rush mode, and the first special due to the small hit of the second special symbol. When the variable display of symbols is interrupted (the subtraction of the timer that manages the variable display time is interrupted), the clocking of "30 seconds" as one set of the rush mode is interrupted in the same way as the variable display of the first special symbol. , and one set will be more than "30 seconds" in terms of production time.

In addition, in the continuous fanning effect, it is displayed that the set will not continue (for example, the ally character loses in the continuous battle effect, etc.), and when the fluctuation stops and becomes a big hit, the decorative pattern of the first special pattern is A specific pattern (a pattern in which the character 'R' indicating that the rush mode is in effect) is switched from a swinging state to a display mode indicating a big win such as '777' and is stopped and displayed.

In other words, if the rush mode continues, the rush mode display ⇒ continuous fanning effect ⇒ continuous fanning effect success display ⇒ rush mode display screen, and when the rush mode ends (variation display time of the first special symbol big hit variation elapses), the sequence is: rush mode display->continuous fanning effect->continuous fanning effect failure display->jackpot display (“777” etc.)->jackpot game.

In addition, in the continuous fanning production, the set may always be in a special state (for example, the ally character is invincible), and the ally character displayed in the rush mode display is displayed in a special state, so that the next continuous fanning production , or may be configured to indicate that the continuous fanning effect will continue by displaying the ally character displayed in the continuous fanning effect in a special state.

<Direction meter A>
Next, the specifications of the performance meter A will be described.

The performance meter A is a display used for suggesting whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is a variable probability jackpot during the variation of the jackpot of the first special symbol.

Five effect balls can be acquired in the effect meter A, and when entering rush mode A, the first effect ball is displayed in blue, and each time the set continues, the effect ball is acquired ( color change). In other words, in the first set, the first effect ball is blue, in the second set, the second effect ball is yellow, and in the third set, the third effect ball is green. In the fourth set, the fourth effect ball turns red, and in the fifth set, all the effect balls change to rainbow color.

In this embodiment, the higher the number of sets (longer the variable time), the higher the percentage of probability variable jackpots (see FIG. 33). , it is possible to directly recognize that the degree of probability variation expectation is increasing every time the color of the production ball changes, and it is possible to expect a series of residences.

Furthermore, using the effect ball (effect ball whose color has changed) acquired during the rush mode A, a variable probability notification effect is performed for informing whether or not the variable probability is achieved during the big hit effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, button effects occur in a predetermined round (for example, 9 rounds) of the jackpot effect, and it is notified whether or not the odds are guaranteed. First, a button image indicating that the button operation is valid is displayed. Next, the effect balls acquired during the rush mode A are aggregated into the button image. Next, depending on the degree of chance increase of the button image (for example, suggesting the degree of chance increase by the size and number of flames, or suggesting the type of button image itself by displaying the button image with high expectation) It suggests the possibility that the performance will be successful. In this manner, the button image is more likely to increase the chance and the button effect is more likely to succeed as the number of acquired effect balls increases.

In addition, in the pre-reading process in the high probability / high base (standby mode A), if there is a jackpot variation pattern in the first special symbol in the hold, in the loss variation before the start of the variation by the jackpot variation pattern , It may be configured to be able to acquire the effect ball according to the result of the preliminary determination related to the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation pattern in the reservation. In this case, the continuation of the number of sets corresponding to the number of effect balls acquired before the rush mode A is started is definitely suggested and notified in advance.

By constructing in this way, the minimum duration of the rush mode can be grasped before the big win variation actually starts, and the degree of expectation for the number of balls obtained by the small win during the rush mode can be determined according to the big win variation. You can increase it even before it starts.

Furthermore, in the same special pattern (for example, only the first special pattern), if there are two big hit reserves, a special production (for example, an extra bonus) is performed from the start of the big hit production by the first big win. It is also possible to display and notify that the next big hit is fixed.

In addition, at this time, the second big hit reservation is a big hit within the random number range that becomes a big hit regardless of whether or not the first big hit reservation is variable, that is, the random number range that makes a big hit with a low probability. A jackpot is preferred. By constructing in this way, the probability of the game state after the end of the big win related to the first big win reservation is low, so that the result of the winning lottery related to the second big win reservation becomes a loss. situation can be prevented.

In addition, in this example, the color of the production ball (announcement image of probability variation expectation degree) is switched step by step according to the number of sets, and finally, five sets are determined to be probability variation after the big hit game. Although all the effect balls are configured to be rainbow-colored, as a modification, the game result during the rush mode (for example, the second big win based on the small hit of the second special symbol) can be changed with respect to the image of the effect balls that have already been acquired. Game ball entering the winning hole C20, execution of the second special pattern losing variation, entering the game ball when the game ball flows down when hitting right, entering the gate or winning hole, etc.) Executed by In order to increase the expectation that the variation of the big hit will change after the big hit, even if a performance lottery is executed to replace the performance ball with a higher-ranking one (or add an effect to the performance ball, etc.) good. By configuring in this way, when the chance of the button effect that occurs in a predetermined round during the big win is increased, not only the number of the effect balls but also the combination of the displayed effect balls (or the effect image) can be used. can be made different, and even in the rush mode, the interest in the game can be enhanced by making the player pay attention to whether or not the performance ball will increase the chance.

<Display screen of high probability / low base (rush mode B)>
Next, the display screen of high probability/low base (rush mode B) will be described with reference to the lower diagram of FIG.

In the high probability / low base (rush mode B), the effect display device SG has
1. 1st special pattern Resident decorative pattern (sub-decorative pattern) ⇒ Lower left side of the LCD screen 2. 2nd special pattern Resident decorative pattern (sub-decorative pattern) ⇒ Lower left side of the LCD screen 3. 1st special symbol Reserved display ⇒ Right middle row of the LCD screen 4. 2nd special symbol reserved display ⇒Right middle row of the LCD screen 5. Right-handed instruction display ⇒ Upper right side of the LCD screen 6. Production mode display ⇒ Upper left side of the LCD screen 7. 2nd special pattern Decorative pattern (main decorative pattern) ⇒ Slightly above the center lower row of the LCD screen 8. Production meter B ⇒ Right side upper to lower part of the LCD screen 9. Cumulative number of balls displayed ⇒ Lower right side of the LCD screen 10. Lamp image ⇒ The upper right part of the LCD screen is displayed.

The performance meter B is a display for suggesting the number of sets (=jackpot variation time) in the jackpot variation of the first special symbol. The lamp image is a display indicating that the jackpot variation is a probability variable jackpot by becoming a lighting image.

In the high probability/high base (standby mode B), the performance meter B starts to change the jackpot of the first special symbol, and when the specific symbol is displayed, the charging performance of charging the meter is performed. In the charge effect, the meter appears to accumulate from bottom to top, one scale on the meter indicates one set, and each time the set continues, the scale decreases by one. there is In addition, one meter is regarded as one set, and each time one meter is charged, the number of charges such as "x 1", "x 2", etc. is displayed, and the number of "x ○" decreases by 1 each time the set continues. Alternatively, a plurality of meters may be displayed and one meter may be cleared each time the set continues. That is, the effect meter A is displayed each time the number of sets continues, while the effect meter B displays the number of sets that continue first.

Incidentally, when all the charged meters in the effect meter B are exhausted, a recharge effect (there is a failure pattern in which the meter is not charged) to recharge the meter may be executed. Further, the specific pattern may be a pattern in which the specific pattern in the rush mode A and the specific pattern in the rush mode B are different. , the specific symbols displayed in the display area of the sub-decorative symbols also differ between the rush mode A and the rush mode B.

Furthermore, in the look-ahead processing in the high probability/high base (standby mode B), if there is a big hit variation pattern in the first special symbol reservation, the big hit is a loss variation before the start of the variation according to the big hit variation pattern. The meter may be configured to be charged according to the variation time of the variation pattern.

Acquired effect balls in the effect meter A are used in the big win effect, but the charged meter in the effect meter B is configured not to be used in the big win effect. That is, in the rush mode B, the player is notified of the degree of expectation for winning prize balls during the rush mode in the performance meter B, while the degree of expectation regarding the button performance during the big win is generated by the button performance during the big win. As a player, it is difficult to estimate whether the hit is a variable probability jackpot or not. When there is a situation where 5 sets are continued due to a recharge effect, etc., it is possible to estimate that the probability is variable before the button effect during the big hit because it is definitely notified that the variable probability big hit is in progress. Become).

The lamp image goes to the second big prize opening C20 not only during the charge performance after the display of the specific symbols in the big win variation, but also during the charge before the start of the big win variation, and based on the small winning symbol stop of the second special symbol during the rush mode. It is constructed so that it can become a lighting image even when a ball is entered, during the performance of a big hit, or the like. It should be noted that during charging before the start of the variation of the big hit, the lighting image can be displayed when the ball enters the second big winning hole C20, etc., because the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is changed to the first special symbol reserve by the pre-reading process. This is a case where the existence of a big win is recognized, and the lighting image can be displayed during the big win performance because the current big win is a probability variable big win, and the player is urged to operate the sub-input button SB during the big win performance. The operation of the sub-input button SB may be performed at a predetermined timing when the sub-input button SB is not activated.

<Power failure recovery during rush mode>
It should be noted that when a power failure occurs during the high probability/low base (rush mode) and the power is restored, the game state information (high probability/low base) is sent from the CPUMC of the main control board M to the CPUSC of the sub control board S. command) is transmitted, and the CPUSC of the sub control board S is configured to return to the rush mode based on the received game state information (command indicating high probability/low base).

It should be noted that the rush mode after power failure recovery is configured to return to the rush mode A predetermined as the default rush mode.

In addition, instead of returning to the rush mode based on the received game state information, the CPUMC of the main control board M to the CPUSC of the sub control board S is transferred to the CPUSC of the sub control board S with a high probability/low base. Variation pattern: variation mode B20, loss variation pattern: variation mode b3) variation start information or variation stop information is transmitted, and the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the received high probability / low base (Minor hit variation pattern: variation mode B20, losing variation pattern: variation mode b3) Based on the variation start information or variation stop information, it may be configured to return to the rush mode.

<Supplement/change example>
In the high probability/high base, when the big hit variation starts, it becomes a high probability/low base, but the display screen of the standby mode is displayed on the effect display device SG until the specific symbols are displayed. At this time, even if the standby mode is displayed on the effect display device SG, since the probability is high/low base, the game state is one in which it is easy to acquire balls by small hits.

At this time (when the standby mode is displayed with a high probability/low base), the ball obtained by the small hit may be counted as the ball obtained during the rush mode. It is not counted as the ball obtained during the standby mode immediately after the start of the big hit change related to the special pattern, and only the ball obtained by the small hit after actually entering the rush mode is counted as the ball obtained during the rush mode. may be configured to

At this time (when the standby mode is displayed with high probability/low base), if the ball obtained by the small hit is counted as the ball obtained during the rush mode, It is possible to accurately count the number of balls obtained after entering the game state in which it is possible to obtain the balls, and only the balls obtained by the small hit after entering the rush mode are the balls obtained during the rush mode. In the case of counting as balls, it is possible to count the number of balls obtained in the apparent rush mode so as to suit the game.

Even if the high probability/high base (standby mode) shifts to the high probability/low base when the first special pattern jackpot fluctuation starts, it is already fluctuating when the first special pattern jackpot fluctuation starts. If not after the second special symbol variation (for small hits: variation mode B10/variation time 10 seconds, loss: variation mode b2/variation time 10 seconds) is completed, a new high probability / low base The lottery for the second special symbol is not performed.

That is, if the variation of the second special symbol starts immediately before the big hit variation of the first special symbol starts, about 10.0 seconds (the second special that started just before the big hit variation of the first special symbol starts Symbol variation time 10 seconds) will be in a state where at least a small hit does not occur.

In this embodiment, the specific symbol is displayed 6 seconds after the start of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, and the rush mode is entered. Even if a game ball enters the second main game start port B10 based on the variation, the lottery is not performed, so the player may feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, when the big hit variation of the first special symbol is started in the high probability / high base (standby mode), the specific symbol is displayed within 6 seconds after the start of the big hit variation of the first special symbol. If it is possible to start the variation of the design, it is 6 seconds after the start of the big hit variation of the 1st special symbol, and it is impossible to start the variation of the 2nd special design within 6 seconds after the start of the big hit variation of the 1st special symbol. When the remaining variation time of the second special symbol is 6 seconds or more at the start of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the specific symbol is displayed at the end of variation of the second special symbol, and the rush mode is entered. It may be configured as By configuring in this way, after the specific pattern is stopped and displayed, the effect indicating that the second special pattern will be a small hit (for example, the main decorative pattern of the second special pattern is stopped and displayed in a small win mode. etc.) is not excessively delayed, and the feeling of loss of the remaining time of the rush mode based on the variation of the second special symbol that started variation before the start of the big hit variation of the first special symbol. I am trying to reduce it.

<Ratio of game balls flowing down>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the ratio of flow of game balls when hitting to the right will be described. Here, a configuration designed by assuming which route and how many balls should flow when 100 game balls are shot for each game state is shown. In addition, although not shown, the game ball is assigned a falling route by opening and closing each electric accessory, a nail, or the like.

First, (a) high base (standby mode/time saving mode) will be described.

First, when hitting to the right, all (100) game balls reach above the auxiliary game starting port H10.

Next, 99 balls of them go to the auxiliary game start opening H10, and 1 ball goes to the direction different from the auxiliary game start opening H10.

Of the game balls that have passed through the auxiliary game starting port H10 (here, the gate), since it is in a high base state and it is easy to enter the auxiliary game electric role object E10, 50 balls go to the auxiliary game electric role object E10. Heading toward the entering ball, 49 balls do not enter the auxiliary game electric function E10 and join the falling route of 1 ball that did not go to the auxiliary game start opening H10 (entering the auxiliary game electric function E10 A total of 50 game balls are not played). In the high base state, most of the game balls that enter the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 enter the first open ball entrance N1 by the action of the sorting device FS, but rarely 2 Also enter the open ball entrance N2.

Of the 50 balls that merge, 19 balls go to the top out D36-2, 30 balls go to the first non-motorized accessory HD-1, and 1 ball goes in the other direction. head to In addition, when the game ball enters the first non-electric accessory HD-1, it shifts to a closed state due to the weight of the game ball, and the first open ball entrance N1 in the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is opened again. does not pass, the closed state is maintained. Therefore, most of the 30 game balls that flowed down toward the first non-motorized accessory HD-1 actually flow further downstream.

One ball headed in another direction and a game ball that did not enter the first non-electric role HD-1 when the first non-electric role HD-1 was in the closed state are the second big winning opening C20. (large winning opening for small winning), second non-electric accessory HD-2, and first large winning opening C10 (large winning opening for big winning). At this time, the second non-electric role product HD-2 is not in the open state, and the second big winning opening C20 is not in the open state (opened based on the small hit of the second special symbol) (Fig. 83 (a) (c ) indicates a state in which the second big winning hole is closed), the ball is entered into the lower out hole D36 without entering those entry holes.

Next, (b) high probability/low base (rush mode) will be described.

First, when hitting to the right, all (100) game balls reach above the auxiliary game starting port H10.

Next, 99 balls of them go to the auxiliary game start opening H10, and 1 ball goes to the direction different from the auxiliary game start opening H10.

Of the game balls that have passed through the auxiliary game starting port H10 (here, the gate), since it is in the low base state, it is difficult to enter the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 compared to the high base state, and 20 balls are Heading toward entering the auxiliary game electric role object E10, 79 balls do not enter the auxiliary game electric role object E10 and join the falling route of 1 ball that did not go to the auxiliary game start opening H10 (auxiliary game A total of 80 game balls that do not enter the electric accessories). In the low base state, most of the game balls entering the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 enter the second open ball entrance N2 by the action of the sorting device FS, but rarely the second 1. Also enter the open ball entrance N1.

Of the 80 balls that merge, 19 go toward the top out D36-2, and 61 go in other directions.

Of the 61 balls heading in other directions, the 15 balls head toward the second big winning hole C20 (small winning big winning hole) (Fig. 83(b) shows that the second big winning hole is open). 20 balls enter the second non-motorized accessory HD-2, and 26 balls enter the first big winning hole C10 (big winning big winning hole). The ball is entered into the lower out hole D36 without doing so. Incidentally, when the first non-motorized accessory HD-1 is open, some of the 61 balls headed in other directions will enter the first non-electrical accessory HD-1. .

Next, (c) during the big hit will be described.

First, when hitting to the right, all (100) game balls reach above the auxiliary game starting port H10.

Next, 99 balls of them go to the auxiliary game start opening H10, and 1 ball goes to the direction different from the auxiliary game start opening H10.

Of the game balls that have passed through the auxiliary game starting port H10 (here, the gate), since it is difficult to enter the auxiliary game electric role object E10 due to the low base state, 20 balls are the auxiliary game electric role object E10. , 79 balls go to the direction not to enter the auxiliary game electric role E10, and join the falling route of 1 ball that did not go to the auxiliary game start opening H10 (to the auxiliary game electric role A total of 80 game balls that go to the direction that does not enter the ball).

Of the 80 merging balls, 19 go toward the top out D36-2, and 61 go in other directions.

The 61 balls that went to the others go to the direction where 20 balls enter the second non-motorized accessory HD-2 without entering the second big winning hole C20 (small winning big winning hole), and further If the 1st big winning hole C10 is open, 41 balls will go to the 1st big winning hole C10 (big winning big winning hole), and if the 1st big winning hole C10 is closed, 41 balls will go. The ball is entered into the lower out hole D36. Although not shown, under normal conditions (low probability/low base), when hitting to the right, the ball flows down along the same route as during a big win (while the first big winning hole C10 is closed).

<<<Explanation of level-up effect (forecast effect/variable effect)>>>
Next, the level-up effect, which is one of the effect modes of the game machine, will be described.

The level-up production is a production that can be executed in both the look-ahead production (the production that suggests the appropriateness of the unvaried suspension) and the variable production (the production that suggests the appropriateness of the variation during variation), and in this example, A configuration in which the level of the stage displayed on the performance display device SG (also called performance stage, mode, performance mode, etc.) is exemplified. It should be noted that the shift to a stage of a higher level by increasing the level suggests that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increasing.

<Transition between stages and stage levels>
Next, stages and stage level transitions will be described with reference to FIG.

In this example, as stage level 1 (Lv1) stages, there are four stages, stage A, stage B, stage C, and stage D, and as stage level 2 stages, there are three stages, stage AA, stage BB, and stage CC. As the three stages, one stage of stage XXX is provided.

The three stages of stage A, stage B, and stage C at stage level 1 are when the CPUSC of the sub control board S wins a stage change lottery executed with a predetermined probability for each change, or when the same stage is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 change), it is configured to shift to a stage different from the stage in which it stayed. Stage D is a stage that shifts after the time-saving mode ends and stays up to 15 times. determined by

Stage A, stage B, and stage C are configured so that different announcements can be made for each stage, and stage background images, display modes of decorative patterns (characters, numbers, etc.), variation modes of decorative patterns, etc. Each stage is configured differently. The different notices for each stage include, for example, normal notices (step-up notices, dialogue notices, and other notices that occur mainly before reach).

Three stages of stage AA, stage BB, and stage CC in stage level 2 (Lv2) are provided as stages leveled up from corresponding stage level 1 respectively. Specifically, stage AA is leveled up from stage A, stage BB is leveled up from stage B or stage D, and stage CC is leveled up from stage C. Therefore, there is no transition to another stage of the same stage level, such as between the three stages of stage A, stage B, and stage C of stage level 1 .

In stage AA, stage BB, and stage CC, the same advance notice as in the stage before leveling up is performed. For example, stage A and stage AA are configured so that a common normal announcement can be executed. In stage level 2, the display mode of decorative patterns (characters, numbers, etc.), the variable mode of decorative patterns, and the like are common. Note that the stage background image is a background image that differs for each stage.

Stage A and stage AA may have different stage background images, or may have the same stage background image, and may be configured such that at least character displays (effect mode displays) indicating the stay stage are different.

Stage XXX at stage level 3 (Lv3) is the highest level stage, and is configured to be accessible from any stage.

It is preferable that at least the characters "stage XXX" are displayed so that stage XXX can be recognized as different from any other stages. It should be noted that it may be configured such that the same notice as that of stage level 1 and stage level 2 can be executed, or that a different notice can be executed. In addition, when stage XXX is configured so that the characters "stage XXX" are not displayed, it is preferable to visually distinguish the stage from other stages so that the player can visually recognize it as stage XXX. is.

When a notice similar to that of stage level 1 and stage level 2 can be executed, a player can easily feel the expectation of a big win by making the notice of the same mode continuously occur. can be configured. When a notice different from the stage level 1 and the stage level 2 can be executed, the players can increase their expectations for the big win by making it easy to recognize the notice that can occur only at the stage level 3. can be configured easily.

<Stage level up within 1 change>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the stage level-up timing within one variation will be described.

First, the timing of leveling up the stage during the period from the start of the change to the tenpai (reach) will be described.

First, when the fluctuation starts, it reaches the first timing at which the stage can be leveled up. At this time, when all the decorative patterns change to special patterns (for example, flame patterns) almost all at once, the level of the stage increases. (suddenly level up)

Next, the second timing is reached at which stage level-up fanning effect can be started. At this time, when a part of the decoration pattern (for example, the left pattern) changes to a special pattern, the stage level-up boost effect is started. In addition, the stage level up fanning effect also has a pattern that succeeds after failing once. The level-up effect that is started at the second timing is effectually continuous with the level-up boost effect at the third timing, which will be described later.

Next, the third timing is reached at which stage level-up fanning effect can be started. Also at this time, depending on whether or not the level-up boost effect is being executed at the second timing, if some decorative patterns (for example, the right pattern or the left pattern and the right pattern) change to special patterns, The stage level up fanning production (a production to incite whether or not the medium pattern changes to a special pattern) will start, and the stage level up fanning production will be successful (the medium pattern will also change to a special pattern, and all patterns will change to special patterns. ) to increase the level of the stage. As an example of a failure pattern of a series of level-up boost effects from the second timing to the third timing, the left pattern became a special pattern at the second timing, but the right pattern (and the middle pattern) became a special pattern at the third timing. , or in the middle of the third timing, the left and right symbols become special symbols, but the middle symbol does not finally become a special symbol.

Next, the fourth timing is reached at which the level of the stage can be increased. At this time, when all the decorative patterns change to special patterns substantially all at once, the level of the stage increases. The effect at the 4th timing is slightly different from the method of leveling up at the 2nd timing and the 3rd timing (an example of changing to a special symbol in order at the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed). A mode in which the three swaying and fluctuating decorative patterns change into special patterns almost at the same time by executing an effect in which the characters appearing in the theme of the motif perform an action on the decorative patterns. is mentioned.

Next, the timing of leveling up the stage after the decorative symbols become Tenpai will be explained.

After the decorative pattern becomes tenpai (sometimes referred to as during normal reach), the fifth timing is reached at which any of the plurality of stage level-up effects may occur.

At the 5th timing, stage level up by button production, stage level up after reach, stage level up by fanning production, stage level up after normal reach loss (+1 shift in medium pattern), after normal reach loss (+1 shift in medium pattern) It is configured so that a stage level-up can occur due to a special stage level-up effect, and a stage level-up after a mission reach.

In the stage level-up by button performance, when a button image is displayed on the performance display device SG at the timing, it indicates that the stage level-up is fixed, and the stage level is raised regardless of whether the button is operated.

In the stage level up due to the post-reach stage level up instigation production, after the introductory production of the post-reach stage level up instigation production is performed, the post-reach stage level up instigation production will occur, and if successful, the stage level will increase, If you fail, the stage level is maintained.

In the stage level up after the normal reach loss (+1 shift in the middle pattern), if it is decided in advance to raise the stage level when the middle pattern is shifted by +1 in the normal reach (example: 787) , stage level up. It should be noted that the stage level up is not always performed when the medium pattern is misaligned by +1 in normal reach.

In the stage level up by the special stage level up production after the normal reach loss (the middle pattern is -1 shift), if the stage level is 1 and the middle pattern is -1 shift in the normal reach (example: 767) A special stage level-up performance for raising the stage level is generated at the time, and the stage level is raised to stage level 3. It should be noted that when the stage level is 1 and the middle symbol is shifted by -1 in normal reach, the special stage level-up effect is not always performed.

In the stage level up after mission reach, after tenpai, it shifts to mission reach, and after mission reach, the stage level goes up to level 3. In mission reach, a losing pattern, a winning pattern, a super reach development pattern, and a stage level 3 transition pattern are rotated like a roulette, and a display corresponding to the stopped pattern is performed. In other words, the stage level is raised to stage level 3 when the stage level 3 shift symbol is stopped.

In addition, in order to make the stage level recognizable, the character display indicating the stay stage is configured to be displayed, for example, in the upper right or upper left of the effect display device SG even after tenpai (during the reach effect: during normal reach, during super reach). Alternatively, characters such as "Lv2" and "Lv3" may be displayed when the stage level increases.

Note that the level-up effect at each level-up timing mentioned here is an example, and the level-up effect may be executed in a different manner at each timing. For example, in the period of timings 1 to 4 before reach, an example of production using decorative symbols has been shown, but production without using decorative symbols may be executed.

<Flow of stage level up before Tenpai>
Next, FIG. 86 is an image diagram of the stage level-up before tenpai.

Currently, the player is staying at stage A which is stage level 1, there is one hold of the first main game symbol (first special symbol), and the variation of the first main game symbol has stopped. One first reserved display is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device SG, and the first reserved sub-display indicating the number of reserved first main game symbols is displayed as "1" on the right side of the second decorative pattern. , the first decorative design (main decorative design) and the second decorative design (sub decorative design) are stopped at "861", and the characters "stage A" are displayed.

Next, the variation is started, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a variable display (for example, scroll display, rotating display, etc.), the first pending display is erased and the variable suggestive display is displayed, The first pending sub-display is decremented by 1 to become "0". It should be noted that the character display of "Stage A" remains as it is because the character remains in Stage A.

Next, all of the first decorative symbols are changed to flame symbols, which are special symbols. (suddenly level up)

Next, when all the first decoration patterns have changed to flame patterns, which are special patterns, the stage level is increased, and the character display of the stage is "Lv2: Stage AA" because the stage level is 2, that is, stage AA. It has become.

Next, the variable display of the first decorative pattern is started (re-variable) again.

Next, the left symbol is displayed as "8", and then the left symbol is changed from "8" to the flame symbol. (Second timing)

Next, the right symbol is displayed as "6", and then the right symbol changes from "6" to the flame symbol. (Third timing start)

Next, a fan effect (for example, gradually changing from a light flame design to a dark flame design) is performed as to whether or not the flame design is displayed in the medium design.

Next, the middle pattern is displayed as a flame pattern, and all the first decoration patterns are flame patterns. (End of 3rd timing)

Next, when all of the first decorative symbols changed to flame symbols, which are special symbols, the stage level increased and became stage XXX of stage level 3, so the character display on the stage was changed to "Lv3: Stage XXX. ”.

Next, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again (re-variation), and thereafter the game progresses until the variation stops at stage XXX of stage level 3. In addition, even if the level is not raised at the first timing, if the level is raised at the second timing and the third timing, the first decorative pattern will be changed again. During this period, the stage level may be raised again at the second timing, the third timing (or the fourth timing).

Although the figure does not show the end of the level-up effect, if the effect is performed based on the advance notice effect of the contents according to the stage level and it is lost, or if it becomes a big hit, the level-up effect will be performed. configured to be terminated. For example, at stage level 2, it ends when it develops into normal reach or super reach and becomes a loss (or a big hit), and when it shifts to stage level 3, it becomes a loss (or a big hit) at super reach An example is configured to terminate at It should be noted that, as a modified example, in the variation after the conditions for the end of these are satisfied, if the variation mode with the level of expectation equal to or higher than the level-up effect that was scheduled to end is executed, the stage level will be taken over. may be configured to display

<Advance lottery>
Next, FIG. 87 will be used to exemplify a lottery method for advance notice when the stage level increases.

First, in this game machine, whether or not the stage level is raised is based on a variation pattern (variation mode) determined by the CPUMC of the main control board M. FIG. Here, the case where the variation pattern 30 (Lv1→temporary stop (flame pattern)→Lv2→normal reach→battle reach→hit) is selected will be described.

When the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the information (command etc.) regarding the variation pattern of the determined variation pattern, it executes the advance notice lottery corresponding to the determined variation pattern.

First, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a lottery as to whether or not the notice to be executed in the stage A, which is the stage level 1, can be executed. In the stage A, three notices A1, A2, and A3 are executable, and a lottery is performed to collectively decide whether or not each notice can be executed. For example, ID0 is "preliminary notice A1: none (not executed), notice A2: none, notice A3: none", and ID1 is "notice A1: yes (execute), notice A2: no notice, notice A3: no notice , and ID2 is "Notice A1: Yes, Notice A2: Yes, Notice A3: No".

Next, a lottery is performed for an announcement pattern that determines the display mode of the announcement that has been determined to be executed. Here, when ID1 (“Notice A1: Yes, Notice A2: No, Notice A3: No”) is selected in the previous stage A lottery for whether or not the notice can be executed, that is, it is decided to execute the notice A1. Therefore, the notice pattern lottery for notice A1 is executed. For example, ID0 is pattern 1, ID1 is pattern 2, and ID2 is pattern 3. Here, ID1 is selected.

Next, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not the notice to be executed in stage AA, which is stage level 2, can be executed. In the stage AA, three notices AA1, AA2, and AA3 are executable, and a lottery is performed to collectively determine whether or not each notice can be executed. For example, ID0 is "preliminary notice AA1: none (not executed), notice AA2: none, notice AA3: none", and ID1 is "preliminary notice AA1: yes (executed), notice AA2: no notice, notice AA3: no notice , and ID2 is "preliminary notice AA1: yes, notice AA2: yes, notice AA3: no notice".

Next, a lottery is performed for an announcement pattern that determines the display mode of the announcement that has been determined to be executed. Here, when ID2 ("Notice AA1: yes, notice AA2: yes, notice AA3: no") is selected in the lottery for whether or not the notice for the preceding stage AA can be executed, that is, notice AA1 and notice AA2 are executed. Since this has been determined, the announcement pattern lottery for the announcement AA1 and the announcement AA2 is executed. For example, in each notice, ID0 is pattern 1, ID1 is pattern 2, and ID2 is pattern 3, for example. Here, it is assumed that ID0 is selected for advance notice AA1 and ID2 is selected for advance notice AA2.

Next, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not the notice to be executed during reach is executed. During reach, three notices of 1 during reach, 2 during reach and 3 during reach are configured to be executable, and a lottery capable of collectively determining whether or not to execute each notice is performed. For example, ID0 is "Reaching 1: None, Reaching 2: None, Reaching 3: None", and ID1 is "Reaching 1: Yes, Reaching 2: None, Reaching 3: None", ID2 is "reaching 1: yes, reaching 2: yes, reaching 3: none".

Next, a lottery is performed for an announcement pattern that determines the display mode of the announcement that has been determined to be executed. Here, if ID 1 (“reaching 1: yes, reaching 2: yes, reaching 3: none”) is selected in the previous lottery for whether or not to execute the notice during reach, that is, execute reach 1 Since it has been decided to do so, an advance notice pattern lottery for 1 in reach is executed. For example, ID0 is pattern 1, ID1 is pattern 2, ID2 is pattern 3, and ID3 is pattern 4, for example. Here, it is assumed that ID2 is selected.

Next, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not notices to be executed during Super Reach (SP) (battle SP, etc.) can be executed. During the super reach, three notices of 1 in SP, 2 in SP, and 3 in SP are executable, and a lottery is conducted to collectively decide whether or not each notice is executable. For example, ID0 is "1 in SP: None, 2 in SP: None, 3 in SP: None", and ID1 is "1 in SP: Yes, 2 in SP: None, 3 in SP: None", ID2 is "1 in SP: Yes, 2 in SP: Yes, 3 in SP: No".

Next, a lottery is performed for an announcement pattern that determines the display mode of the announcement that has been determined to be executed. Here, when ID2 (“1 in SP: Yes, 2 in SP: Yes, 3 in SP: No”) is selected in the lottery for whether or not to execute the notice in the previous SP, that is, 1 in SP and SP Since it is decided to execute middle 2, the advance notice pattern lottery for 1 in SP and 2 in SP is executed. For example, in each notice, ID0 is pattern 1, ID1 is pattern 2, ID2 is pattern 3, and ID3 is pattern 4, for example. Here, it is assumed that ID3 is selected for 1 out of SP and ID3 is selected for 2 out of SP.

Next, to summarize the results of the announcement lottery,
1. Lottery for execution of notice at stage level 1 (stage A) ⇒ID1: With notice A12. Notice pattern lottery for notice A1 ⇒ ID1: pattern 2
3. Lottery for execution of notice at stage level 2 (stage AA) ⇒ ID2: With notice AA1, with notice AA2 4. Notice pattern lottery for notice AA1 ⇒ ID0: pattern 1
Notice pattern lottery for notice AA2 ⇒ ID2: pattern 3
5. Lottery for execution of reach notice ⇒ ID1: reach 1 available6. Reach 1 notice pattern lottery ⇒ ID2: Pattern 3
7. 8. Lottery for execution of advance notice during SP ⇒ ID2: 1 during SP, 2 during SP Notice pattern lottery for 1 in SP ⇒ ID3: Pattern 4
Notice pattern lottery for 2 in SP ⇒ ID3: Pattern 4
It has become.

In this way, by linking whether or not the stage level up can be executed to the variation pattern, it is possible to execute only the required number of advance notice lotteries so as to correspond to the level up of the stage even in the advance notice lottery. .

<Example of changes to advance notice lottery>
In addition, if the stage level up is not tied to the fluctuation pattern and is determined by lottery (stage level up execution lottery, timing lottery, level up number lottery, etc.), it is assumed that each stage level from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation Execute all the notice lottery contents for each stage level (from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation), and set the timing of leveling up (timing of level up production occurring) separately. A lottery may be drawn, and the announcement effect executed at the stage when the stage level-up is performed during the variable display may be configured to switch the result of the announcement lottery according to the stage level after the level-up.

Specifically, if you are staying in stage A at the start of the fluctuation, first, the announcement execution possibility lottery and pattern lottery at stage A at stage level 1 (including during reach and SP), stage AA at stage level 2 and the advance notice lottery and pattern lottery of stage XXX at stage level 3 are executed.

Next, a stage level-up lottery is performed, and in the stage level-up execution possibility lottery, if the execution of the stage level-up is not decided, the result of the notice execution possibility lottery and pattern lottery of stage A, which is stage level 1 Only will be used, and if the stage level up execution, execution timing, and number of level ups are determined by the stage level up execution lottery, the stage that is stage level 1 until the stage level up is performed Use the decision result of the notice execution possibility lottery and pattern lottery of A, and after the stage level up is performed, use the decision result of the notice execution possibility lottery and pattern lottery of stage AA of stage level 2 or stage XXX of stage level 3 It will happen.

<Flow of stage level up by pre-reading>
Next, FIG. 88 is an image diagram of stage level-up by the look-ahead effect. For example, when a new hold (third hold) occurs, the pre-determination of the CPUMC of the main control board M obtains a determination result that is a variation pattern in which variation pattern number 32 in FIG. The CPUSC of the control board S conducts a lottery for the possibility of execution of prefetching based on the command indicating that the variation pattern number 32 is to be executed, which is transmitted from the CPUMC of the main control board M, and the execution of the stage level up by the prefetching effect is determined. It is an example of the flow of effects that can be executed when

Currently, the player is staying at stage A, which is stage level 1, and there are three pending first main game symbols (first special symbols), and fluctuation of the first main game symbols has stopped. Three first pending displays are displayed on the display screen of the effect display device SG, and "3" is displayed as the first pending sub-display indicating the number of pending first main game symbols to the right of the second decorative symbols. , the first decorative design (main decorative design) and the second decorative design (sub decorative design) are stopped at "861", and the characters "stage A" are displayed.

Next, the variation is started, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the first reserved display is erased by one, the variation suggestive display is displayed, and the first reserved sub-display is subtracted by 1. and is "2". It should be noted that the character display of "Stage A" remains as it is because the character remains in Stage A.

Next, a small explosion image is displayed approximately in the center of the effect display device SG, but the display of the small explosion image does not raise the stage level.

Next, the display of the small explosion image is erased, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern stop at "716", and the fluctuation stops. Note that the change suggestion display is not displayed when the change is stopped.

Next, the next variation is started, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the first reserved display is erased by one, the relevant variation suggestive display is displayed, and the first reserved sub-display is subtracted by 1. is set to "1". It should be noted that the character display of "Stage A" remains as it is because the character remains in Stage A.

Next, a small explosion image is displayed approximately in the center of the effect display device SG, and then the small explosion image changes to a large explosion image.

Next, the display of the large explosion image is erased, and when the large explosion image is displayed, the stage level increases. The decorative pattern stops at "871" and the fluctuation stops.

Next, the next variation is started, and thereafter, the game progresses until the variation stops at stage AA of stage level 2 .

In this way, the look-ahead effect executed before the variation of the look-ahead opportunity suspension (holding of winning the lottery for starting the look-ahead effect) is an effect for suggesting that the look-ahead opportunity suspension is a big hit. It is the actual situation that there is almost no expectation of a big hit for the change before the change of the look-ahead opportunity hold. In this example, although not described in detail, it is configured so that the notice can be displayed even after the look-ahead effect is displayed. It may be configured so as not to display the notice for inciting the other. For example, if the look-ahead effect displayed before holding the look-ahead opportunity is configured to be displayed only when there is a loss variation, when the look-ahead effect is displayed, the variation will not be a win, so the player can use the look-ahead effect It is possible to draw attention only to the display mode of , and to effectively encourage whether or not the change related to the subsequent hold will be successful.

In addition, in this example, as the loss variation pattern in the low probability / low base (normal time), a relatively short variation time is provided such as the variation mode a1 of 3 seconds and the variation mode a2 of 5 seconds. Therefore, the look-ahead effect is configured to be displayed immediately after the start of the fluctuation.

In addition, when the stage level increases and when the stage level does not increase, at least a part of the advance notice lottery table (prediction execution availability lottery table, pattern lottery table) will be different. becomes.

In addition, when the pre-reading effect (including the stage level-up stage effect, that is, regardless of the success or failure of the stage level-up) is executed, the notice that can occur immediately after the start of the fluctuation, that is, the pre-read effect and the effect display timing For notices that can overlap, even if it is decided to execute the notice in the notice lottery, it is configured not to be executed (cancelled) so as not to interfere with the display of the pre-reading effect. good too.

It should be noted that, when the look-ahead effect is executed, a predetermined lottery table may be used so as not to execute an announcement with overlapping displays.

In addition, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the execution timing of the notice that the display overlaps can be changed, and after the display of the look-ahead effect ends, the notice that the look-ahead effect and the display overlap should be displayed. By configuring so as to allow both of the advance notice effects to be displayed, it may be configured to be able to be displayed.

In this example, in the stage level-up in the look-ahead effect, the configuration is such that a small explosion image and a large explosion image are displayed without using decorative symbols, but a configuration using decorative symbols is also possible. For example, the stage level may be raised when a special symbol is displayed.

<Stage level up lottery table for pre-reading production>
Next, FIG. 89 is a stage level-up lottery table for the look-ahead effect.

First, as a prerequisite shown in this figure, it is a case where the execution of the look-ahead effect is decided in the hold that newly entered the fourth hold, and the next change is the change related to the hold of "hold 3". Secondly, the change is performed in the order of the change related to the hold of "hold 2", then the change related to the hold of "hold 1", and finally the change of hold related to the "pertinent change" for which execution of the look-ahead performance is decided.

In addition, for example, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead effect in the third hold, it is configured so that one of the IDs 4 to 8 in this figure is determined, and the next change is "hold 2 ” can be configured to be a change related to the suspension of “.

The lottery for whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed when there is no variation pattern of reach or more in the hold that entered the ball earlier, and until the change in the hold that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect ends. will be explained assuming that a lottery for whether or not to execute a new look-ahead effect will not be performed, but if there is a variation pattern of reach or more in the hold that entered the ball earlier, a new look-ahead effect will be performed even if the look-ahead effect is already in progress. It may be configured to perform a lottery for whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect. In this case, it is possible to overwrite the result of the execution possibility lottery and the pattern lottery by the new look-ahead effect and execute it.

The stage level-up lottery table collectively determines the success/failure of the stage level-up until the change of the hold (here, the change = the latest hold) triggered to start the look-ahead performance.

For example, when ID 1 is selected, first, when the change related to the hold of “hold 3” starts, the stage level up stage effect (display of the small explosion image in FIG. 88) is displayed, but failure (= stage The level does not increase (that is, the large explosion image in FIG. 88 is not displayed), and the fluctuation ends. Next, when the change related to the hold of "hold 2" is started, the stage level-up promotion effect is displayed, but it fails and the change ends. Next, when the change related to the suspension of "suspension 1" starts, the stage level up stage effect is displayed and succeeds (=the stage level increases, that is, the large explosion image in FIG. 88 is displayed), The stage level rises from level 1 to level 2, and the change ends. Next, the pending variation of “this variation” starts at stage level 2 .

87, when the CPUMC of the main control board M and the CPUSC of the sub control board S specify that the change is a variation pattern that is determined to start from Lv2. , the CPUSC of the sub-control board S may be configured to select ID1 and ID5 as the stage level-up (prefetch) pattern.

Thus, as shown in FIGS. 33, 86, 88, etc., in this game machine, based on the variation pattern, it is suggested whether or not the variation will result in a big hit by increasing the stage level within one variation. By raising the stage level over multiple fluctuations, the production of leveling up due to fluctuations related to later suspension is omitted (for example, the stage level is raised by the prefetching production, and if the LV2 fluctuation starts, the prefetching and a pattern suggesting whether or not a big win will be achieved by eliminating the need to display the stage level upgrade from level 1 to level 2 in the object variation.

In this gaming machine, even if there is no hold, there is a possibility that a variation pattern (eg, variation mode A4) associated with a stage level-up due to the look-ahead effect will be selected.

In this case, since the look-ahead effect cannot be executed, it is configured to select the pattern by ID7 or ID8, and the stage level up that could not be performed as the look-ahead effect is executed at the start of the change (immediately after the start of the change). It can be dealt with by In addition, here is an example in which the stage level is raised immediately after the start of fluctuation (the stage level is suddenly raised) in the look-ahead lottery for the hold that occurred under the condition of no hold. However, if the stage level has not been raised before the start of the fluctuation, the stage level will be raised in the advance notice lottery at the start of the fluctuation, in which the fluctuation of the fluctuation mode A4 will be performed instead of the foreseeing lottery. You may comprise so that the content of the production|presentation to perform may be determined.

As described above, the variation in which the look-ahead effect (success or failure of stage level up) is executed is a variation pattern that does not become a reach, and a notice other than the look-ahead effect regardless of the variation time of the variation pattern (for example, normal (notice) is configured not to be executed. By configuring in this way, the player can pay attention to the look-ahead effect, and can be made to feel the look-ahead effect as an effect with a high expectation for a big win.
<<<Reach performance>>>
Next, FIG. 90 is a timing chart of the annihilation effect which is the ready-to-win effect.

The annihilation effect is a effect during reach that can occur after tenpai (reach), and determines development effect 1 that develops after this. It should be noted that after the annihilation effect, development effect 1 (battle effect) does not always develop, and after development effect 1, development effect 2 (battle effect) does not always occur.

First, when the annihilation effect is started, it becomes possible to select a character. The annihilation effect is configured such that the effect mode differs according to the selected character.

<Timing chart when character A is selected>
When the character A is selected, button effects are produced up to three times. There are three pressing patterns: a single press, a long press, and a continuous press. configured to use. Also, long press will not be destroyed during the one button production period selected this time, but it will be a chance (high possibility of destroying many enemies) at the next button operation. It is configured (specifically, when the subsequent button effect occurs, an image that imitates the button, which is the operation promotion image of the effect button, is displayed in a chance-up mode such as red, or destroys more enemies (e.g., At the end of the annihilation effect, a development fanning button effect is performed in which if successful, the game progresses to development effect 1, and if unsuccessful, the variation ends. Further, after the development performance 1, the development performance 2 is configured to be executed.
<Timing chart when character B is selected>
When the character B is selected, six button effects occur. The pressing pattern is only single-shot pressing, and is configured to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit by the displayed effect mode. At the end of the annihilation effect, as in the case of selecting character A, a development push button effect is performed in which, if successful, the development progresses to the development effect, and if it fails, the fluctuation ends. Further, after the development performance 1, the development performance 2 is configured to be executed.

In this manner, the character A and the character B can be selected in the annihilation effect, and the effect time for the character A and the effect time for the character B are the same effect time. In addition, by constructing the performance time for one button performance (single-press) when selecting character A and the performance time for two button performances when selecting character B to be substantially the same, different performance modes are executed. making it possible.

<Flow of annihilation effect when character A is selected>
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the flow of the annihilation effect when character A is selected will be described.

First, the display screen is changed in stage A, and the tenpai is established at "8".

Next, a character selection screen for selecting character A or character B develops into an annihilation effect and is displayed. On the character selection screen, the characters "Please select a character" are displayed, the options "A" and "B", and the cross key SB-2 for executing the selection are displayed. The character selection is configured to be finalized when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, and the currently selected option is highlighted during selection. there is

Next, the selected character (character A in this case) is displayed, suggesting that the effect will be displayed to destroy the enemy. Here, furthermore, the reach symbol "8" is displayed at the top of the screen, and the number 1 to 8 as decorative symbols are displayed at the bottom of the screen. 0/8") is being performed. In addition, the numbers, which are the decorative patterns at the bottom of the screen, are the final stop patterns other than the left and right patterns in the ready-to-win state, and represent candidate patterns as stop patterns for the decorative patterns in the middle pattern row during fluctuation. .

Next, an enemy character (one of the enemy characters 1 to 18 in the annihilation effect) is displayed, and a button image indicating that the button can be pressed to annihilate the enemy character is displayed.

Next, when the enemy character is destroyed, "x" is displayed on the enemy character, the number of destroyed characters is displayed as "1/8", and "4", which was a selectable decorative pattern, is replaced with "x". is displayed, indicating that "4" will not be selected as the missing symbol of the final stop symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol.

Next, character A is displayed before the second button depression.

Next, an enemy character different from the first time is displayed, a button image is displayed, and the button can be pressed for the second time.

Next, when the enemy character is destroyed, "X" is displayed on the enemy character, the number of destroyed characters is displayed as "2/8", and "5", which was a selectable decorative pattern, is replaced with "X". is displayed, indicating that "5" will not be selected as the losing symbol.

Next, character A is displayed before the third button depression.

Next, an enemy character different from the first and second times is displayed, a button image is displayed, and the button can be pressed for the third time.

Next, in the case where the enemy character is destroyed, the enemy character is displayed with an "x", the number of destroyed characters is displayed as "3/8", and the selectable symbol "2" is replaced with an "x". This is a display indicating that "2" will not be selected as a losing symbol.

Next, a button effect is performed to suggest whether or not to progress to the development effect 1 (battle effect). ing.

Next, the development push button effect for suggesting whether or not to progress to the development effect 1 (battle effect) is successful, and the effect movable object YK is moving in front of the effect display device SG.

Next, it develops to development production 1 (battle production).

In this way, in the annihilation effect when character A is selected, each time an enemy character is annihilated, the losing pattern is destroyed (including the display of "x"), and by indicating that the losing pattern is not selected, the winning pattern is displayed. It is configured so that the possibility of being selected can be visually recognized.

In addition, the button pressing pattern in the annihilation effect when character A is selected is
(1) Single press → Single press → Single press (2) Single press → Long press → Single press (3) Single press → Repeated press (4) Long press → Single press → Single press (5) Long press → Repeated press It is configured as follows.

Also, the symbol destruction in the annihilation effect when character A is selected (display of "x" in the candidate display of the final stop decoration symbol at the bottom of the screen)
(1) Single press: No symbol destruction, 1 symbol destruction, 2 symbol destruction, 3 symbol destruction (2) Long press: 3 next symbol destruction, 4 next symbol destruction, 5 next symbol destruction 1, 6 next symbol destructions (3) In the case of repeated hits: 3 symbol destructions, 4 symbol destructions, 5 symbol destructions, and 6 symbol destructions are configured to be selected.

<Flow of annihilation effect when character B is selected>
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the flow of the annihilation effect when character B is selected will be described.

First, the display screen is changed in stage A, and the tenpai is established at "8".

Next, a character selection screen for selecting character A or character B develops into an annihilation effect and is displayed. On the character selection screen, the characters "Please select a character" are displayed, the options "A" and "B", and the cross key SB-2 for executing the selection are displayed. The character selection is configured to be finalized when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, and the currently selected option is highlighted during selection. there is

Next, the selected character (character B in this case) is displayed, suggesting that the effect will be displayed to destroy the enemy. Here, furthermore, the reach symbol "8" is displayed at the top of the screen, and the number 1 to 8 as decorative symbols are displayed at the bottom of the screen. 0/8") is being performed.

Next, an enemy character is displayed, a button image for destroying the enemy character is displayed, and a target mark is displayed on the pattern "6" to be destroyed. When the character B is selected, a plurality of button images become one button when destroying the enemy character, and the number of the gathered plurality of button images is configured to indicate the degree of expectation for destroying the pattern. Here, an effect pattern in which two button images are gathered is displayed, and when the two button images are moved so as to overlap with each other at the bottom center of the screen, the button image is displayed to indicate that the operation of the effect button is valid. is configured as follows.

Next, in the case where the enemy character cannot be destroyed, the enemy character is displayed without being destroyed, and the number of destroyed characters remains "0/8". However, there is a crack in the pattern "6" which is the object to be destroyed.

Next, character B is displayed before the second button depression.

Next, the same enemy character as the first time is displayed again, an effect pattern in which two button images are gathered is displayed, and the button can be pressed for the second time. In addition, the target mark is displayed again at the cracked "6".

Next, in the case where the enemy character is destroyed, an "X" is displayed on the enemy character, the number of destroyed characters is displayed as "1/8", and an "X" is displayed on the symbol "6" where the target mark is displayed. This is a display indicating that "6" will not be selected as a losing symbol.

Next, character B is displayed before the button is pressed for the third time.

Next, an enemy character different from the first and second times is displayed, an effect pattern with four button images is displayed, a target mark is displayed on the symbol "3" to be destroyed, and the button is pressed for the third time. is possible.

Next, when the enemy character is annihilated, an "x" is displayed on the enemy character, an "x" is displayed on the pattern "3" where the target mark is displayed, and four button images are gathered. Since the display of the effect pattern is a chance pattern, "4" is also displayed with "x", indicating that "3" and "4" are not selected as the losing pattern, and the number of annihilation is displayed. It is "3/8". In this example, only one target mark is displayed, and the "x" display is also displayed on symbols that do not display the target mark, thereby additionally increasing chances at the timing of displaying the effect result to the player. However, the target mark is displayed first for all the symbols that are scheduled to not be selected as the losing symbols due to the display pattern of the button image, the type of the enemy character, etc. may be

After that, the effect is performed up to the sixth time, and similarly to when character A is selected, a button effect is performed to suggest whether or not to develop to the development effect 1 (battle effect) at the end. If you succeed, the battle effect will develop!" and a button image are displayed.

Next, the development button performance for suggesting whether or not to develop into development performance 1 (battle performance) fails, and the performance movable object YK does not move in front of the performance display device SG, and the fluctuation stops. It's becoming

Note that the button pressing pattern in the annihilation effect when character B is selected is only single pressing.

Also, the pattern destruction in the annihilation effect when character B is selected is configured to correspond to the number of button images.
(1) 2 button images: nothing, cracked, 1 destroyed, multiple destroyed (2) 4 button images: 1 destroyed, multiple destroyed (3) 8 button images: selected from multiple destroyed be.

<Supplementary information on specifications common to character A and character B>

The enemy characters (1 to 18) that appear during the annihilation production are associated with the enemy characters and the expected number of destroyed symbols. character 12, and so on. Further, the high expectation patterns of symbol destruction, such as repeated hits and 8 button images, are configured to occur easily in the order of enemy character 1<enemy character 7<enemy character 12. FIG.

Also, the enemy characters (1 to 18) are preferably grouped according to the expected number of destroyed symbols. 12, high expectation group: enemy characters 12 to 18, and so on.

If the button is not pressed during the annihilation effect, the enemy character is not apparently annihilated and the pattern is not destroyed. In addition, when the button is not pressed, the player cannot recognize the number of destroyed symbols, so that it is displayed as "?/?", "1/?", "?/8". may be

If the long press pattern is selected during the annihilation effect and the effect button is pressed long, the button image changes to the chance button image (one size larger, etc.), and the chance button image is translucent until the next button press timing. , and is configured to indicate that the next button press is a chance. On the other hand, if the effect button is not long pressed, the button image is erased and the translucent chance button image is not displayed.

In the continuous hit pattern during the annihilation effect, a display of annihilating a plurality of enemy characters (the same character or different characters may be used) is displayed, making it easy to recognize that it is a chance.

In the development to development production 1, if the number of symbols destroyed in the annihilation production is three, it develops to battle production A with enemy character A, and the ratio (expectation) of winning a big hit is 1/5 (eight 3 of the decorative patterns are destroyed and cannot be selected), and if the number of destroyed patterns in the annihilation performance is 4, it develops into a battle performance B with an enemy character B, resulting in a big hit. The ratio is 1/4, and if the number of symbols destroyed in the annihilation effect is 5 or more, the battle effect C with the enemy character C develops, and the ratio of winning a big hit is 1/3. If the number of destroyed symbols is 6, the battle effect D with the enemy character D develops, and the ratio of winning a big hit is 1/2.

It is preferable that the probability of success of the development incitement button production increases as the number of destroyed symbols increases (the higher the number of destroyed symbols, the higher the expectations for development production 1, that is, the battle production that develops later). (This is because if the development performance 1 is not developed even though the expectations for the development are increasing, the player's expectations will be betrayed by that much, leading to a decrease in the player's willingness to play). In addition, a pattern may be provided in which the development fanning button performance is successful when the number of destroyed symbols is 3 or less, and a transition to the battle performance A may be made when the number of destroyed symbols is 3 or less.

Also, if the number of destroyed symbols is 3 or more, it may be configured such that the development fanning button production is always successful and the battle production is started.

Further, the battle effect D with the enemy character D occurs as development effect 1 in the case of transition from annihilation effect to development effect 1, and transition from annihilation effect to development effect 1 (≠battle effect D) to development effect 2. It is configured so that it can occur in two ways, that is, as the development effect 2 in the case where it occurs.

Specifically, as described above, if the number of symbols destroyed in the annihilation effect is 6 or more, the battle effect develops to D, and if the number of symbols destroyed in the effect effect is 5 or less, the battle effects A to C occur. Develop. The effect is configured so that the symbols can be destroyed even during the execution of the battle effects A to C. For example, symbol destruction is possible at 1 during the SP determined in the lottery for advance notice during the Super Reach (SP) in FIG. It is configured to determine the presence/absence.

In this case, three symbol destructions are further performed during the execution of the battle performance A, two further symbol destructions are performed during the execution of the battle performance B, and one more symbol destruction is performed during the execution of the battle performance C. , and the total number of destroyed symbols is 6, so after the battle production of the development production 1 being executed, the conditions for developing to the battle production D as the development production 2 are met, and after the battle production being executed, to the battle production D Develop. In addition, even if the symbols are destroyed during the battle performance A and the battle performance B, and one (or two) symbols are destroyed, the battle performance B or the battle, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the battle performance being executed, is displayed. There is no development to the production C, and it is configured to develop to the battle production D when a total of 6 symbols are destroyed.

Therefore, the display of "N/M" indicating the number of destroyed symbols (N = number of destroyed symbols, M = total number of target symbols) may be continued even during execution of battle effects A to C. However, the number of destroyed symbols may be hidden during execution of the battle effect. In addition, if it is configured to continue to display "N/M" during the execution of the battle effects A to C, it is configured to be hidden when the last symbol destruction timing during the execution of the battle effects A to C has passed. can do.

In addition, as a modification, a specific battle performance (for example, the battle performance D that has the highest degree of expectation and may develop even after the transition to other battle performances) among the battle performances A to D is performed with a big hit change. As a condition to be executed (to win in the performance lottery), by setting a condition that the jackpot pattern is α2 when a big win is achieved, when a big win is achieved in a specific battle performance, a "big bonus" is set. (A jackpot that shifts to a high probability/high base after a jackpot)", and is configured to increase the attention of the player to the destruction of the symbols during the annihilation performance or the battle performance. good too.

<<<Chance>>>
Next, a chance eye, which is a special stop combination, which is one of the look-ahead effects, will be described.

The colors of the decorative patterns in this game machine are ``1: green'', ``2: blue'', ``3: red'', ``4: blue'', ``5: green'', ``6: blue'', ``7: red'', and ``8: Blue", and like the expectations of other advance notices, the expectations of big hits indicated by the decorative patterns are configured to increase in the order of blue < green < red. For example, the likelihood of a big hit is higher with a green symbol than with a blue symbol, and the likelihood of a big hit is higher with a red symbol than with a green symbol. Further, the chance numbers described here are also configured so that the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of blue symbol chance<green symbol chance<red symbol chance.

The chance eye in this game machine may be in a state in which three decorative patterns of the same color are not arranged, and two identical decorative patterns may be arranged side by side. For example, if it is ``223'', it is configured as a ``2'' blue symbol chance, if it is ``655'', it is configured as a ``5'' green symbol chance, and if it is ``533'', it is configured as a ``3'' red symbol chance. .

First, as described with reference to FIG. 70, the second chance is executed when a lottery result including "the second chance: yes" is obtained by lottery using the prefetch lottery table (won the chance).

If the player wins the chance by lottery based on the look-ahead lottery table, the chance scenario determination table of FIG. 93 is referenced to determine one of the execution patterns.

Next, chance scenario patterns will be described with reference to FIG.

The chance scenario pattern that can be determined when a new game ball enters the fourth reserve is
(1) ID 0 ... 3 before change: left blue → 2 before change: left blue → 1 before change: left blue ID 1 ... 3 before change: left blue → 2 before change: left blue → 1 before change: right blue・ 3 before change: left blue → 2 before change: left green → 1 before change: right green (4) ID3 ... 3 before change: left blue → 2 before change: left green → 1 before change: right red (5 ) ID4... 3 before change: left blue → 2 before change: left green → 1 before change: promotion right red , The red pattern chance eye is composed of the middle pattern and the right pattern (6) ID 5 ... 3 before change: left blue → 2 before change: promotion left green → 1 change before: promotion right red * "Promotion left green" is , After the blue symbol chance is about to be displayed or once displayed, the left symbol and the middle symbol constitute the green symbol chance (7) ID 6 ... 3 before change: left green → 2 before change: left Green → 1 before change: left green (8) ID 7 ... 3 before change: left green → 2 before change: left green → 1 change before: left red (9) ID 8 ... 3 before change: left green → 2 Before change: left red → 1 before change: right red (10) ID 9 . . . 3 before change: right red → 2 before change: right red → 1 before change: right red.

The chance scenario pattern that can be determined when a new game ball enters the third pending game is
(1) ID0... 2 before change: left blue → 1 before change: left blue (2) ID1... 2 before change: left blue → 1 before change: right green (3) ID2... 2 before change : Left blue → 1 change before: promotion right green (4) ID 3 ... 2 changes before: left green → 1 change before: left green (5) ID 4 ... 2 changes before: left green → 1 change before: right Red (6) ID5 --- 2 before change: left green → 1 before change: promotion right red (7) ID 6 --- 2 before change: right red → 1 before change: right red.

The second chance scenario pattern that can be determined when a new game ball enters the second reserve is
(1) ID0...1 before change: left blue (2) ID1...1 before change: left green (3) ID2...1 before change: promotion right green (4) ID3...1 before change : Right red (5) ID 4...1 Before change: Promotion right red.

ID0 is likely to be selected when the degree of expectation of a big win is low, and is difficult to be selected when the degree of expectation of a big win is high, and ID9 is likely to be selected when the degree of expectation of a big win is high, and is selected when the degree of expectation of a big win is low. It is configured to be difficult, that is, it is configured to be more likely to be selected when the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher as the ID increases.

Incidentally, when the chance eye scenario pattern is determined and the stop symbol is determined in the decorative symbol display content determination processing of step 5700, it is determined which stop symbol will be the chance eye. At this time, it is preferable that the stop symbol is determined so as not to cause a reach. Also, the two stop symbols forming the chance eye may be the same symbol or may be different symbols (for example, symbols of the same color).

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the flow of the presentation of the chance eye will be described. As for the decorative symbols, "1" is a green symbol, "6" is a blue symbol, "7" is a red symbol, and "8" is a blue symbol.

First, the first main game symbol (first special symbol) is in a state of four reserved symbols, and the decorative symbol is "861" and the variation is stopped.

Next, the variation is started, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a variable display (for example, scroll display, rotating display, etc.), one of the first pending displays is erased, and the variation suggestive display is displayed. , and the first pending sub-display is decremented by 1 to become "3".

Next, immediately before the fluctuation stop, the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at "667", which is a blue symbol chance.

Next, the fluctuation has stopped, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design have been fixed and stopped at "667".

Next, the next variation is started, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the first reserved display is erased, the relevant variation suggestive display is displayed, and the first reserved sub-display is displayed. 1 is subtracted and becomes "2".

Next, immediately before the fluctuation stop, the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at "118", which is a green symbol chance.

Next, the fluctuation is stopped, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are fixed and stopped at "118".

Next, the next variation is started, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the first reserved display is erased, the relevant variation suggestive display is displayed, and the first reserved sub-display is displayed. 1 is decremented to become "1".

Next, "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left symbol, and then "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right symbol.

Next, the middle symbol "1" is displayed moving from top to bottom on the liquid crystal screen, and the "1" is stopped to prompt whether or not it will be a green symbol chance. .

Next, the medium symbol "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of a green symbol chance. It should be noted that instead of temporarily stopping the middle symbol "1" here, a display may be made to encourage whether or not the "1" will be stopped.

Next, the symbol row of the medium symbols is changed again.

Next, immediately before the fluctuation stop, the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at "177", which is the red symbol chance. In other words, in this variation, red symbol chances are shown instead of green symbol chances.

In order to accurately recognize the chance number for each variation, for example, when the chance number in the variation is displayed, an effect is displayed (for example, blue symbol chance ⇒ blue effect, green symbol chance ⇒ Green effect, red symbol chance ⇒ red effect) may be configured. With this configuration, the green effect is not displayed in the green chance display before the re-change, and the red effect is displayed in the red chance display after the re-change.

Next, the fluctuation is stopped, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are fixed and stopped at "177".

Then, the change of the hold that triggered the start of the second chance (=won the lottery for execution of the second chance) starts.

<< Supplement to Chances >>
<Display pattern>
For example, when "4" (blue symbol) on the left symbol and "5" (green symbol) on the right symbol are temporarily stopped, "4" is slowly scrolled and displayed on the middle symbol, and the blue symbol is a chance. When it becomes, the "5" pattern is displayed and it becomes a green symbol chance eye, so that the symbol that can be a chance eye with low expectations ("4" here) and the symbol that can be a chance eye with high expectations (here It is preferable to determine the decoration pattern so that the number "5") is as close as possible.

By determining in this way, the time required to display the high-expectation chance eye is shortened. For example, the time required to scroll after "4" and display "5" (4→5) requires the scroll time for one symbol, and scroll after "4" and display "1". The time required for display (4->5->6->7->8->1 or 4->3->2->1) requires scrolling time for five patterns or three patterns.

It should be noted that, not only when the pattern to advance the pattern is executed, but also when the pattern to return is executed, it is preferable to determine the decorative pattern so that the left and right patterns are similar in number as much as possible. is.

In addition, in this gaming machine, when the blue symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) chances are displayed while the green symbols (“1”, “5”) are displayed, is configured such that a green symbol close to a blue symbol is selected. For example, if the blue symbol is "2", the green symbol is "1", if the blue symbol is "4", the green symbol is "5", if the blue symbol is "6", the green symbol is "5", When the blue symbol is "8", the green symbol is "1".

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the chance up in a short time without spending more time than necessary at the time of the chance up, and reduce the stress that the player feels from being shown the chance up for a long time. can be mitigated.

Further, as a modified example, when the chance number is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, at least one of the symbols stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol has the degree of expectation indicated by the previous chance symbol. Chance symbols with the same degree of expectation (for example, if it was a blue symbol chance symbol last time, the blue symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol or the right symbol), and the left and right symbols are arranged in order. When stopping and displaying, always stop and display the chance eye constituent symbols that have the same level of expectation as the previous level of expectation (for example, if the stop display order of the decorative symbols is the left, right, and middle symbols) For example, if the left pattern is always a blue pattern, or if the pattern of the stop display order of decorative patterns is to allow the right pattern to be stopped and displayed before the left pattern, then the blue pattern is set to be the stop display pattern for the right pattern first. stop).

By configuring in this way, when a chance eye is displayed in the previous variation, the first decorative pattern stopped and displayed is a chance eye composition symbol that can have a higher degree of expectation than the previous chance eye, In a situation where the expectation for stop display of a chance eye with a higher degree of expectation than the previous change is heightened, the display of the second stop display symbol and the third stop display symbol is lower than the first chance symbol constituting the stop display. It is possible to prevent the symbols constituting the chance number of the degree of expectation from being stopped and displayed so that the feeling of expectation is attenuated within one fluctuation. In this modified example, in the first variation of the chance eye effect, the stop order of the symbols constituting the chance eye in the left symbol and the right symbol is not set. Since the symbol that is first stop-displayed in the variation symbol is "3: red symbol", the possibility of stop-display of the chance symbol is eliminated (the symbol that can be displayed as the chance symbol that is more than the red symbol as the second stop symbol is (because there is no such thing).

<Display pattern>
In FIG. 94, the pattern in which the medium pattern is scrolled again to make the red pattern chance eye has been described, but the pattern is not limited to such a pattern in which only the medium pattern is scrolled again, and the left or right pattern that has been temporarily stopped first. Any one of the symbols may also be scrolled again to display a chance eye. For example, chances may be displayed as follows: "4↓6"⇒"4(4)6" (4 is a temporary stop display)⇒"4↓↓"⇒"455".

Also, promotion failure patterns may be provided. For example, if the pattern is "3 changes before: left blue → 2 changes before: left blue → 1 change before: promotion failure left blue", before 3 changes and 2 changes, the left pattern and middle as usual The blue symbol chance eye by the symbol is displayed, and before 1 change, promotion from the blue symbol chance eye so that "4 ↓ 5" ⇒ "4 (4) 5" ⇒ "4 ↓ 5" ⇒ "445" It looks as if it will, but it is not actually promoted and a blue symbol chance is displayed.

Also, in the promotion failure pattern, it is preferable to stop at a symbol close to the blue symbol so as not to misidentify the promotion to the green symbol. For example, "445" (left blue symbol chance) -> (next change) "4↓5" -> "435". At this time, the player has to decide whether the blue symbol chance will continue at "445", or whether the green symbol chance will be promoted at "455", or whether the chance will end. We are paying attention to which one it will be. The decorative patterns are scrolled at a slow speed, and when the "4" passes (does not stop), the next "5" will stop (promote). , the player will be severely discouraged. Therefore, if the chance number does not continue, the symbol (here, "3") displayed in front of the symbol (here, the blue symbol, "4") with a lower degree of expectation for the chance number is stopped. It is preferable to configure the player so as not to have useless expectations, and to make the player expect whether the game will be the same as last time or whether the game will be promoted only when the number of chances continues or when the game is promoted.

In addition, the display of the second chance is started, and the display of the second chance ends in the middle (before the start of the change in the hold of winning the lottery for execution of the second chance), or the display of the second chance ends once. A reviving pattern or the like may be provided.

(Pattern where the display of chance eyes ends in the middle)
For example, as a chance scenario pattern that can be determined when a new game ball enters the fourth reserve, the pattern is "3 changes before: left blue → 2 changes before: left blue → 1 change before: none". may be provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 95, stop at "861" ⇒ 3 changes before: stop at "667" (blue symbol chance) ⇒ 2 changes before: stop at "667" (blue symbol chance) ⇒ Before 1 change: "6 ↓ 7 → 6 (6) 7 (medium symbol "6" to stop blue symbol chance eye) → 6 ↓ 7 → 617" (no chance eye). This pattern is likely to be selected when the degree of expectation for a big hit is low.

In addition, when there is no chance number before one variation, by configuring so that the blue symbol is selected as the left symbol or the right symbol, it is possible to incite whether the blue symbol chance number will continue or not. .

(Pattern where the display of the first chance ends and revives once)
For example, as a chance scenario pattern that can be determined when a new game ball enters the fourth reserve, a pattern of "3 changes before: left blue → 2 changes before: none → 1 change before: left blue". may be provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, "861" ⇒ 3 changes before: "667" (blue symbol chance) ⇒ 2 changes before: none ⇒ 1 change before: "667" (blue symbol chance) Become. Since this pattern is finally a blue symbol chance eye, it is likely to be selected when the expectation of a big hit is low.

(Display of second decorative pattern at chance eye display timing)
When the first decorative symbol (main decorative symbol) is determined and stopped at the chance, the second decorative symbol (sub decorative symbol) is also determined and stopped at the chance. In addition, since the second decorative pattern continues to scroll while it is fluctuating, by executing a pattern such as "promoted left green", the first decorative pattern displays a chance eye (in this case, "left blue" is displayed once. display), the second decorative design is not displayed corresponding to the chance that is once displayed as the first decorative design.

(Sound effect corresponding to the stop display of the chance)
When the chance number is stopped and displayed as the first decorative symbol, a special stop sound may be output to indicate that it is a chance number. In addition, different special stop sounds may be used for the blue symbol chance, the green symbol chance, and the red symbol chance, or the same special stop sound may be used for the blue symbol chance and the green symbol chance, which have relatively low expectations. A different special stop sound may be used for a red symbol chance eye with a relatively high degree of expectation.

<Prohibition processing>
(When shortened fluctuation is lost)
After the execution of the chance performance as a look-ahead performance is started, when a new suspension occurs after the trigger suspension, the variation display from the 3rd variation to the 1st variation before the variation for the trigger suspension is shortened variation loss. (Variation mode a1, 3 seconds). right red) is configured not to run.

For example, if ID5 is selected in hold 4, promotion left green will be executed 2 moves ahead. However, when shortened variation loss (variation mode a1, 3 seconds) is selected as the variation before 2 variations, there is no time to once display the blue symbol chance eye and then promote it to the green symbol chance eye. , Instead of being promoted, it is configured to change to a pattern that displays left green from the beginning (the green design is stopped in the left design and the middle design) at the start of the fluctuation.

(Chance and timer effects)
FIG. 97 is a modification of the configuration diagram of the prefetch lottery table in FIG.

In this figure, "timer effect" is provided as a type of look-ahead effect, and once displayed, the timer effect is displayed in the change of suspension (pre-reading opportunity suspension) in which execution of the timer effect is decided in the look-ahead lottery table. will continue to be displayed until the For example, when execution of the timer effect is determined in Hold 4, the character display of "timer waiting" is performed from the start of the next fluctuation, and the character "timer waiting" is displayed at a predetermined timing in the fluctuation of the look-ahead opportunity hold. The display changes to, for example, "60:00" (60 seconds), the countdown starts from "60:00", and when it reaches "00:00", the display of the timer effect is erased and the timer effect ends.

Like this timer effect, there is a look-ahead effect that continues to be displayed until the change of the look-ahead opportunity suspension exists, and the execution of the above-mentioned "pattern in which the display of the chance eye ends in the middle" and the timer effect are performed. When combined, there is a concern that the player's interest in the timer effect will be remarkably reduced due to a pattern in which the display of the chance number ends in the middle of the chance number.

Therefore, in the lottery for whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect in the look-ahead lottery table, the pattern of ending the display of the chance number in the middle is not executed, so that if the timer effect and the chance number are won at the same time, the It is possible to configure so that the pattern in which the display of the chance eye ends with is not executed.

Incidentally, if the "no false chance" is not provided, the chance scenario determination table may be changed according to whether or not the timer effect is won. Specifically, when the timer effect is won, a chance scenario determination table is used which does not include a pattern of ending the display of the chance in the middle. A chance scenario determination table is used which has a pattern in which the display of a chance scenario ends at .

(Stage level up and second chance)
In the stage level up in the look-ahead effect, as described above, a special pattern may be used as the decorative pattern. However, since the decorative symbols are used even in the chance eye, the prefetching lottery table may be configured so that both cannot be executed at the same time.

Incidentally, it is also possible to provide a chance scenario determination table so that a special symbol that triggers a stage level up can be displayed at the chance.

For example, at the time of hold 4 in FIG. 93, a pattern of "3 fluctuations before: left blue → 2 fluctuations before: left green → 1 fluctuation before: promotion special design" is provided, and 1 fluctuation before green design chance eye to red design It can be configured so that a special pattern is displayed under the pretense of being promoted to a chance eye.

In addition, in the variation determined to execute the "promotion special pattern", if the shortened variation loss (variation time 3 seconds in this example) is selected as the variation pattern, the production that pretends to be promoted is performed. The pattern can be changed to a pattern in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the special symbols can be displayed.

<Example of changing chance number>
(Valid line)
Although this gaming machine has been described as a one-line machine with one effective line, in the case of a five-line machine with five effective lines, the same symbols may be displayed with a shift on the liquid crystal display screen. In this case, the chance eye can be configured so that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs according to the form of display of the same symbol.

Specifically, it is a chance eye as shown in FIGS. 98A to 98D, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is configured to be D=C<B<A. Here, when the pattern constituting the chance eye is displayed in the middle, the degree of expectation for the big hit is the highest when the trigger pending is displayed, when the two patterns are lined up, the second highest, and when the three patterns are disjointed case is the lowest. Even in such a configuration, the promotion effect can be executed before the symbol row in the middle row, which is the final stop symbol row, stops. For example, by scrolling leftward one or two patterns in the middle row from the situation where it is likely to be stopped and displayed in the state of FIG. Either mode A) or (B) may be used, or the mode shown in FIG. 98(B) may be changed to mode (A) by moving back one pattern in the middle row to the right. .

It should be noted that, as explained for the one-line machine of this gaming machine, the configuration may be applied in which two symbols are arranged side by side to be a chance.

Further, as the chance eye, the display mode of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed together with the stop display of the special symbols may be treated as the chance eye, or a plurality of decorations may be displayed during one variable display of the special symbols. The temporary stop display mode at the timing of the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols during execution of the re-variation effect in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner may be treated as a chance.

<<<spec change example>>>
In the present embodiment, a so-called ST machine (probability variable number cut) in which the probability variation ends at 10000 times has been described, but it is also possible to apply the probability variation to a gaming machine that continues until the "next big hit".

M Main control board A 1st main game related electric member, A10, A10-2 1st main game start port A11s, A11s-2 1st main game start port entrance ball detection device A20 1st main game pattern display device A21g 1st Main game symbol display part A21h First main game symbol reservation display part B Second main game related electrical component B10 Second main game start port B11s Second main game start entrance ball detection device B20 Second main game symbol display device , B21g 2nd main game symbol display portion B21h 2nd main game symbol reservation display portion C 1st and 2nd main game common related electrical components, C10 1st big winning opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device, C11d 1st Big prize mouth electric accessory C20 Second big prize mouth, C21s Second big prize mouth winning detection device C21d Second big prize mouth electric accessory FS Sorting device, FB Sorting member HD-1 First non-electric accessory, HD-2 Second non-electric accessory E10 Auxiliary game electric accessory, E10s Auxiliary game electric accessory entrance ball detection device N1 First open entrance, N1 Second open entrance H Auxiliary game-related electric member, H10 Auxiliary Game starting port H11s Auxiliary game starting port entry detection device, H20 Auxiliary game design display device H21g Auxiliary game design display unit, H21h Auxiliary game design reservation display unit S Sub control board, SM Effect display control means (sub main control board)
SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit)
SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decorative pattern display area, SG12 first suspension display part SG13 second suspension display part SG14 relevant fluctuation suggestion display part SB sub-input button, SBs sub-input button input detection device SB-2 cross key KH Prize ball payout control board, KE prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

a starting port into which a game ball can enter;
an identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
a performance display unit capable of displaying a performance;
A sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the obtained random number as pending until a condition for permitting judgment is satisfied when a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means;
When the approval/disapproval judgment permission condition for a certain hold is satisfied, a decision is made based on the random number associated with the hold, and the stop display mode and the variable display mode of the identification information are determined based on the result of the pass/fail decision. game content determination means;
identification information display control means for performing control such that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section and then the identification information is stopped and displayed in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
a special game control means capable of executing a special game in an advantageous state for the player after the identification information is stop-displayed after winning is determined as a result of winning/failure determination based on the random number;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display to be executed on the side of the sub-game unit to the side of the sub-game unit;
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
effect display content control means for controlling effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
a performance pattern display control means for controlling to display the final display mode of the performance symbols in the performance display unit after the performance symbols are variably displayed in the performance display unit;
When the final display mode of the performance symbols is a special stop combination, it is configured to suggest the possibility that there is a hold in which the result of the winning judgment is a win in the hold that has occurred based on the special stop combination,
The special stop combination is the case where the types of the effect symbols in the two symbol variation areas in the final display mode are the same,
When the special stop combination is not displayed in the next change after the change in which the special stop combination is displayed,
In the variation in which the special stop combination is displayed, the first effect symbol displayed in the first symbol variation area or the third effect symbol displayed in the third symbol variation area is displayed as the special stop combination . It is constructed so that the performance symbols with low expectation of winning in the case of winning can be displayed in the first symbol variation area or the third symbol variation area even in the variation in which the special stop combination is not displayed,
In the special stop combination, the second design for performance displayed in the second design variation area is the first design for performance displayed in the first design variation area or the third design for performance displayed in the third design variation area. The execution expectation of the special game differs depending on whether it is displayed with the same production pattern as
A pachinko machine characterized by:

Images